Operator's Manual: Order No. P117 0017 13 Part No. 117 584 40 03 Edition A 2017

CLA
Operator's Manual
CLA Operator's Manual
É11758440031ËÍ
1175844003
Order no. P117 0017 13 Part no. 117 584 40 03 Edition A 2017
Symbols Publication details
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol- Internet
lowing symbols:
G WARNING Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
Warning notes make you aware of dangers following websites:
which could pose a threat to your health or
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
life, or to the health and life of others.
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor- Editorial office
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal. Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
! Notes on material damage alert you to dan- out written permission from Daimler AG.
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i Practical tips or further information that Vehicle manufacturer
could be helpful to you.
X This symbol indicates an instruction Daimler AG
that must be followed. Mercedesstra e 137
X Several of these symbols in succession 70327 Stuttgart
indicate an instruction with several Germany
steps.
(Y This symbol tells you where you can
page) find more information about a topic.
Dis‐ This text indicates a message on the
play multifunction display/multimedia dis-
play.
As at 14.10.2015
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz media system from your authorized
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz Center.
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi- Digital form via the Internet
cle before driving. For your own safety and a The Operator's Manual on the Internet pro-
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and vides easy access to all information
warning notices in this Operator's Manual. regarding your vehicle and multimedia sys-
Ignoring them could result in damage to the tem. It also provides helpful animations,
vehicle or personal injury to you or others. interesting background information and a
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow wide array of search options.
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- Digital form as an App
Benz Limited Warranty. Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you
The equipment or product designation of your can view all the information on your vehicle
vehicle may vary depending on: and multimedia system via mobile Internet
RModel or download it independently of network
access. Available for smartphones or tab-
ROrder
lets.
RCountry specification
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
RAvailability
App:
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle: Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App
RPrinted Operator's Manual may not yet be available in your country.
RMaintenance Booklet Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
REquipment-dependent supplements Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all A Daimler Company
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App:
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on your vehicle's equipment
and multimedia system. It contains infor-
mative animations, individual language
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the afore-
mentioned digital media, you also have the
option to obtain a comprehensive printed
version of the Supplement for your multi-
1175844003 É11758440031ËÍ
2 Contents
Mirrors ................................................... 95
Index ....................................................... 4 Memory function ................................... 97
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 22 Lights and windshield wipers ............ 99

Introduction ........................................... 22 Exterior lighting ..................................... 99
Operation ............................................... 22 Interior lighting .................................... 102
Replacing bulbs ................................... 103
Introduction ......................................... 23 Windshield wipers ................................ 106
Protecting the environment ................... 23
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 23 Climate control ................................. 109
Operator's Manual ................................. 24 Overview of climate control systems ... 109
Service and vehicle operation ................ 24 Operating the climate control sys-
Operating safety .................................... 26 tems .................................................... 114
QR codes for the rescue card ................ 28 Air vents .............................................. 119
Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 28
Information on copyright ....................... 30
Driving and parking .......................... 120
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 120
At a glance ........................................... 31 Driving ................................................. 120
Cockpit .................................................. 31 DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles
Instrument cluster ................................. 32 except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ......... 127
Multifunction steering wheel ................. 33 DYNAMIC SELECT controller
Center console ...................................... 34 (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................... 128
Door control panel ................................. 37 Automatic transmission ....................... 129
Overhead control panel ......................... 38 Refueling ............................................. 137
Parking ................................................ 140
Safety ................................................... 39 Driving tips .......................................... 143
Panic alarm ............................................ 39 Driving systems ................................... 148
Occupant safety .................................... 39
Children in the vehicle ........................... 53 On-board computer and displays .... 174
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 59 Important safety notes ........................ 174
Driving safety systems ........................... 60 Displays and operation ........................ 174
Protection against theft ......................... 67 Menus and submenus ......................... 177
Display messages ................................ 188
Opening and closing ........................... 69 Warning and indicator lamps in the
SmartKey ............................................... 69 instrument cluster ............................... 216
Doors ..................................................... 75
Trunk ..................................................... 77 Multimedia system ........................... 227
Side windows ......................................... 80 General notes ...................................... 227
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding Important safety notes ........................ 227
panel ...................................................... 84 Function restrictions ............................ 227
Operating system ................................ 228
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 89
Correct driver's seat position ................ 89 Stowage and features ...................... 233
Seats ..................................................... 89 Loading guidelines ............................... 233
Steering wheel ....................................... 94 Stowage areas ..................................... 233
Contents 3
Features .............................................. 238
Maintenance and care ...................... 254

Engine compartment ........................... 254
ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 258
Care ..................................................... 259
Breakdown assistance ..................... 266

Where will I find...? .............................. 266
Flat tire ................................................ 266
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 271
Jump-starting ....................................... 273
Towing and tow-starting ...................... 276
Fuses ................................................... 279
Wheels and tires ............................... 282

Important safety notes ........................ 282
Operation ............................................ 282
Winter operation .................................. 284
Tire pressure ....................................... 285
Loading the vehicle .............................. 292
All about wheels and tires ................... 295
Changing a wheel ................................ 301
Wheel and tire combinations ............... 306
Technical data ................................... 307

Information regarding technical data ... 307
Vehicle electronics .............................. 307
Identification plates ............................. 308
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ...................................................... 309
Vehicle data ......................................... 314
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Front air bag (driver, front

passenger) ....................................... 45
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Important safety notes .................... 44
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Introduction ..................................... 44
tion System) Knee bag .......................................... 45
4MATIC Occupant Classification System
Display message ............................ 213 (OCS) ............................................... 46
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
drive) .................................................. 159 lamps ............................................... 40
12 V socket Side impact air bag .......................... 45
see Sockets Window curtain air bag .................... 46
Air vents
A Important safety notes .................. 119
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Rear ............................................... 119
Display message ............................ 189 Setting the center air vents ........... 119
Function/notes ................................ 60 Setting the side air vents ............... 119
Important safety notes .................... 60 Air-conditioning system
Warning lamp ................................. 218 see Climate control
Accident Alarm
Automatic measures after an acci- ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 67
dent ................................................. 53 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 67
Activating media mode Switching the function on/off
General notes ................................ 232 (ATA) ................................................ 67
Activating/deactivating cooling Alarm system
with air dehumidification ................. 114 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Active Brake Assist AMG
Activating or deactivating .............. 182 Adaptive sport suspension sys-
Display message ............................ 194 tem ................................................ 158
Function/notes ................................ 61 Performance Seat ............................ 93
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 66 AMG adaptive sport suspension
Adaptive Damping System system
Function/notes ............................. 159 General Information ....................... 158
Adaptive Highbeam Assist AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 185
Display message ............................ 202 AMG Performance exhaust sys-
Function/notes ............................. 101 tem ..................................................... 126
Switching on/off ........................... 102 Anti-lock braking system
Additional speedometer ................... 184 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 312 Anti-Theft Alarm system
Address book see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
see also Digital Operator's Man- Ashtray ............................................... 240
ual .................................................. 227 Assistance display (on-board com-
Adjusting the volume puter) .................................................. 182
Audio 20 ........................................ 228 Assistance menu (on-board com-
COMAND ....................................... 228 puter) .................................................. 182
Air bags ASSYST PLUS
Deployment ..................................... 51 Displaying a service message ........ 258
Display message ............................ 197 Driving abroad ............................... 259
Index 5
Hiding a service message .............. 258 Engaging park position

Information about Service ............. 258 (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 131
Resetting the service interval dis- Engaging park position automati-
play ................................................ 258 cally ............................................... 130
Service message ............................ 258 Engaging reverse gear ................... 130
Special service requirements ......... 258 Engaging the park position ............ 129
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Holding the vehicle stationary on
Activating/deactivating ................... 67 uphill gradients .............................. 133
Function ........................................... 67 Kickdown ....................................... 133
Switching off the alarm .................... 67 Manual shifting .............................. 135
ATTENTION ASSIST Oil temperature (on-board com-
Activating/deactivating ................. 183 puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 185
Display message ............................ 205 Overview ........................................ 129
Function/notes ............................. 169 Problem (malfunction) ................... 137
Audio 20 Pulling away ................................... 124
Switching on/off ........................... 228 Selector lever ................................ 131
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 180 Starting the engine ........................ 123
Audio system Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 135
see separate operating instructions Transmission position display ........ 131
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Transmission position display
see Qualified specialist workshop (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 129
Authorized workshop Transmission positions .................. 132
see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic transmission emer-
AUTO lights gency mode ....................................... 137
Display message ............................ 201
see Lights B
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 259
Back button ....................................... 228
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
Backup lamp
stop function) .................................... 125
Display message ............................ 200
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 60
start/stop function) .......................... 125
Battery (SmartKey)
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 99
Checking .......................................... 72
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes .................... 72
Accelerator pedal position ............. 132
Replacing ......................................... 72
Changing gear ............................... 132 Battery (vehicle)
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 129
Charging ........................................ 273
Drive program ................................ 133
Display message ............................ 203
Drive program display .................... 129
Important safety notes .................. 271
Driving tips .................................... 132
Jump starting ................................. 273
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehi- Belt
cles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
see Seat belts
cles) ............................................... 127 Blind Spot Assist
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
Activating/deactivating (on-
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 128
board computer) ............................ 183
Emergency running mode .............. 137
Display message ............................ 206
Engaging drive position .................. 131
Notes/function .............................. 171
Engaging neutral ............................ 130
6 Index
Blootooth® C
Connecting a different mobile
California
phone ............................................ 232
Important notice for retail cus-
Bluetooth®
tomers and lessees .......................... 24
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 231 Calling up a malfunction
see also Digital Operator's Man-
see Display messages
ual .................................................. 227 Car
Telephony ...................................... 230
see Vehicle
Brake Assist
Care
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Car wash ........................................ 259
Brake fluid
Carpets .......................................... 265
Display message ............................ 194
Display ........................................... 263
Notes ............................................. 312
Exhaust pipe .................................. 263
Brake force distribution
Exterior lights ................................ 262
see EBD (electronic brake force
Gear or selector lever .................... 264
distribution)
Interior ........................................... 263
Brake lamp
Matte finish ................................... 261
Replacing bulbs ............................. 105
Notes ............................................. 259
Brake lamps
Paint .............................................. 260
Display message ............................ 199
Plastic trim .................................... 263
Brakes
Power washer ................................ 260
ABS .................................................. 60
Rear view camera .......................... 262
BAS .................................................. 60
Roof lining ...................................... 265
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 312
Seat belt ........................................ 264
Braking assistance appropriate to
Seat cover ..................................... 264
the situation ..................................... 62
Sensors ......................................... 262
Display message ............................ 189
Steering wheel ............................... 264
EBD .................................................. 66
Trim pieces .................................... 264
Hill start assist ............................... 124
Washing by hand ........................... 260
HOLD function ............................... 156
Wheels ........................................... 261
Windows ........................................ 261
Maintenance .................................. 146
Wiper blades .................................. 262
Parking brake ................................ 141
Wooden trim .................................. 264
Riding tips ...................................... 145
Cargo compartment enlargement ... 236
Warning lamp ................................. 217
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 237
Braking assistance appropriate to
CD
the situation
Function/notes ................................ 62
Breakdown ual .................................................. 227
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 180
Where will I find...? ........................ 266
Center console
see Flat tire
see Tow-starting Lower section .................................. 35
see Towing away Upper section .................................. 34
Central locking
Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 175
Automatic locking (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 184
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 69
Change of address .............................. 25
Index 7
Change of ownership .......................... 25 Switching the rear window

Child defroster on/off ............................ 117
Restraint system .............................. 55 Switching the ZONE function
Child seat on/off ............................................ 116
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 58 Cockpit
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Overview .......................................... 31
anchors ............................................ 56 COMAND
On the front-passenger seat ............ 57 Switching on/off ........................... 228
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 58 COMAND display
Top Tether ....................................... 56 Cleaning ......................................... 263
Child-proof locks Combination switch .......................... 100
Important safety notes .................... 58 Compass
Rear doors ....................................... 59 Calibrating ..................................... 252
Children Calling up ....................................... 252
Special seat belt retractor ............... 54 Magnetic field zone maps .............. 252
Cigarette lighter ................................ 241 Setting ........................................... 252
Cleaning Connecting a USB device
Mirror turn signal ........................... 262 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Climate control ual .................................................. 227
Air-conditioning system ................. 110 Consumption statistics (on-board
Automatic climate control (dual- computer) .......................................... 177
zone) .............................................. 112 Controller ........................................... 228
Controlling automatically ............... 115 Convenience closing feature .............. 82
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 114 Convenience opening feature ............ 82
Defrosting the windows ................. 117 Coolant (engine)
Defrosting the windshield .............. 116 Checking the level ......................... 257
General notes ................................ 109 Display message ............................ 202
Indicator lamp ................................ 115 Filling capacity ............................... 313
Information about using auto- Important safety notes .................. 312
matic climate control ..................... 113 Temperature (on-board computer,
Maximum cooling .......................... 117 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 185
Notes on using the air-condition- Temperature gauge ........................ 175
ing system ..................................... 111 Warning lamp ................................. 223
Overview of systems ...................... 109 Cooling
Problem with the rear window see Climate control
defroster ........................................ 118 Copyright ............................................. 30
Problems with cooling with air Cornering light function
dehumidification ............................ 115 Display message ............................ 199
Refrigerant ..................................... 313 Cruise control
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 314 Activation conditions ..................... 149
Setting the air distribution ............. 115 Cruise control lever ....................... 148
Setting the air vents ...................... 119 Deactivating ................................... 149
Setting the airflow ......................... 116 Display message ............................ 208
Setting the temperature ................ 115 Driving system ............................... 148
Switching air-recirculation mode Function/notes ............................. 148
on/off ............................................ 118 Important safety notes .................. 148
Switching on/off ........................... 114 Setting a speed .............................. 149
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 118
8 Index
Storing and maintaining current Function/notes ............................. 150

speed ............................................. 149 Important safety notes .................. 150
Cup holder Setting a speed .............................. 153
Center console .............................. 239 Setting the specified minimum
Important safety notes .................. 238 distance ......................................... 153
Rear compartment ......................... 239 Stopping ........................................ 153
Customer Assistance Center Storing a speed .............................. 152
(CAC) ..................................................... 27 Switching off .................................. 154
Customer Relations Department ....... 27 Distance recorder ............................. 177
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 225
D Distance warning function
Function/notes ................................ 61
Dashboard
Warning lamp ................................. 225
see Instrument cluster Doors
Data
Automatic locking (on-board com-
see Technical data
puter) ............................................. 184
Daytime running lamps
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 76
Display message ............................ 201
Central locking/unlocking
Function/notes ................................ 99
(SmartKey) ....................................... 69
Switching on/off (on-board com-
Control panel ................................... 37
puter) ............................................. 184
Display message ............................ 214
Declarations of conformity ................. 26
Emergency locking ........................... 76
Diagnostics connection ...................... 27 Emergency unlocking ....................... 76
Digital Operator's Manual Important safety notes .................... 75
Help ................................................. 22 Opening (from inside) ...................... 75
Introduction ..................................... 22 Drinking and driving ......................... 143
Digital speedometer ......................... 178 Drive program
DIRECT SELECT lever Automatic transmission ................. 133
Automatic transmission ................. 129 Display ........................................... 131
Display messages Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 129
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 258 SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 186
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 188 Driver's door
Driving systems ............................. 205 see Doors
Engine ............................................ 202 Driving abroad
General notes ................................ 188 Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 259
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 188 Driving on flooded roads .................. 147
Lights ............................................. 199 Driving safety system
Safety systems .............................. 189 Active Brake Assist .......................... 61
SmartKey ....................................... 214 Braking assistance appropriate to
Tires ............................................... 209 the situation ..................................... 62
Vehicle ........................................... 211 Driving safety systems
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 60
Activating ....................................... 152 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 66
Calling up a speed ......................... 152 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 60
Cruise control lever ....................... 151 Distance warning function ............... 61
Display Message ............................ 207 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Displays in the instrument cluster .. 154 bution) ............................................. 66
Driving tips .................................... 155
Index 9
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- DYNAMIC SELECT button

gram) ............................................... 63 Climate control (3-zone automatic
Important safety information ........... 60 climate control) ............................. 114
Overview .......................................... 60 Climate control (air-conditioning
STEER CONTROL ............................. 66 system) .......................................... 111
Driving system DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehi-
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 150 cles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 160 cles) .................................................... 127
Parking Pilot .................................. 162 DYNAMIC SELECT controller
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................. 128
vehicles) ........................................ 157
Start-off assist ............................... 157 E
Driving systems
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
AMG adaptive sport suspension
bution)
system ........................................... 158
Display message ............................ 191
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 169
Function/notes ................................ 66
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 171
ECO display
Cruise control ................................ 148
Function/notes ............................. 144
Display message ............................ 205
On-board computer ....................... 177
HOLD function ............................... 156
ECO start/stop function
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 172
Automatic engine start .................. 125
Lane Tracking package .................. 171
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 125
Rear view camera .......................... 166
Driving tips Deactivating/activating ................. 126
General information ....................... 125
Automatic transmission ................. 132
Brakes ........................................... 145
Introduction ................................... 124
Break-in period .............................. 120
Electronic Stability Program
Checking brake lining thickness .... 146
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 155 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Downhill gradient ........................... 145 Emergency
Drinking and driving ....................... 143 Automatic measures after an acci-
Driving in winter ............................. 147 dent ................................................. 53
Driving on flooded roads ................ 147 Emergency release
Driving on wet roads ...................... 147 Driver's door .................................... 76
Exhaust check ............................... 143 Trunk ............................................... 80
Fuel ................................................ 143 Vehicle ............................................. 76
General .......................................... 143 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Hydroplaning ................................. 147 Activation ......................................... 51
Icy road surfaces ........................... 147 Emissions control
Limited braking efficiency on sal- Service and warranty information .... 24
ted roads ....................................... 146 Engine
Snow chains .................................. 285 Check Engine warning lamp ........... 222
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 120 Display message ............................ 202
Wet road surface ........................... 145 ECO start/stop function ................ 124
DVD video Engine number ............................... 309
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 180 Irregular running ............................ 126
see also Digital Operator's Man- Jump-starting ................................. 273
ual .................................................. 227 Starting problems .......................... 126
10 Index
Starting the engine with the Exhaust pipe

SmartKey ....................................... 123 Cleaning ......................................... 263
Starting with the Start/Stop but- Exterior lighting
ton ................................................. 123 Cleaning ......................................... 262
Switching off .................................. 140 see Lights
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 279 Exterior mirrors
Engine electronics Adjusting ......................................... 95
Problem (malfunction) ................... 126 Dipping (automatic) ......................... 96
Engine jump starting Folding in when locking (on-board
see Jump starting (engine) computer) ...................................... 185
Engine oil Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 96
Adding ........................................... 256 Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 96
Additives ........................................ 312 Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 96
Checking the oil level ..................... 255 Setting ............................................. 96
Checking the oil level using the Storing settings (memory func-
dipstick .......................................... 255 tion) ................................................. 98
Display message ............................ 204 Storing the parking position ............. 97
Filling capacity ............................... 312 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 234
Notes about oil grades ................... 311
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 255 F
Temperature (on-board computer,
Favorites
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 185
Entering an address Overview ........................................ 229
Filler cap
ual .................................................. 227 see Refueling
Flat tire
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
MOExtended tires .......................... 267
gram)
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 266
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 186
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 268
Characteristics ................................. 64
Floormats ........................................... 253
Deactivating/activating (button
Frequencies
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 65
Mobile phone ................................. 307
Deactivating/activating (except
Two-way radio ................................ 307
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 64
Fuel
Deactivating/activating (on-
Additives ........................................ 311
board computer, except
Consumption statistics .................. 177
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 182
Displaying the current consump-
Display message ............................ 189
tion ................................................ 178
Function/notes ................................ 63
Displaying the range ...................... 178
General notes .................................. 63
Driving tips .................................... 143
Important safety information ........... 63
E10 ................................................ 310
Trailer stabilization ........................... 66
Fuel gauge ....................................... 32
Warning lamp ................................. 219
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- Grade (gasoline) ............................ 310
tem) ...................................................... 63
Problem (malfunction) ................... 139
Exhaust
Refueling ........................................ 137
see Exhaust pipe
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 310
Exhaust check ................................... 143
Index 11
Fuel filler flap Adjusting (rear) ................................ 92

Opening ......................................... 138 Headlamps
Fuel level Fogging up ..................................... 102
Calling up the range (on-board see Automatic headlamp mode
computer) ...................................... 178 Heating
Fuel tank see Climate control
Capacity ........................................ 310 High beam flasher ............................. 100
Problem (malfunction) ................... 139 High-beam headlamps
Fuses Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 101
Allocation chart ............................. 280 Display message ............................ 200
Before changing ............................. 279 Replacing bulbs ............................. 105
Fuse box in the engine compart- Switching on/off ........................... 100
ment .............................................. 280 Hill start assist .................................. 124
Fuse box in the front-passenger HOLD function
footwell .......................................... 280 Activating ....................................... 156
Important safety notes .................. 279 Deactivating ................................... 156
Display message ............................ 205
G Function/notes ............................. 156
Home address
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ..................... 251
ual .................................................. 227
General notes ................................ 249
Hood
Closing ........................................... 255
Opening/closing the garage door .. 251
Display message ............................ 213
Problems when programming ........ 251
Programming (button in the rear-
Opening ......................................... 254
view mirror) ................................... 249
Horn ...................................................... 31
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 250
Gasoline ............................................. 310 Hydroplaning ..................................... 147
Gear indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 185 I
Genuine parts ...................................... 23 Ignition lock
Glove box ........................................... 234 see Key positions
Google™ Local Search Immobilizer .......................................... 67
see also Digital Operator's Man- Indicator lamp
ual .................................................. 227 Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 105
Indicator lamps
H see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
Handbrake
see Turn signals
see Parking brake
Instrument cluster
HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 78
Overview .......................................... 32
Hazard warning lamps
Settings ......................................... 183
Display message ............................ 214
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32
Switching on/off ........................... 101
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 174
Head restraints
Interior lighting
Adjusting ......................................... 91
Control ........................................... 103
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 92
Overview ........................................ 102
12 Index
Reading lamp ................................. 102 High beam flasher .......................... 100

iPod® High-beam headlamps ................... 100
see also Digital Operator's Man- Light switch ..................................... 99
ual .................................................. 227 Low-beam headlamps .................... 100
Parking lamps ................................ 100
J Rear fog lamp ................................ 100
Setting exterior lighting ................... 99
Jack Standing lamps .............................. 100
Storage location ............................ 266 Switching the daytime running
Using ............................................. 303 lamps on/off (on-board com-
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 273 puter) ............................................. 184
Turn signals ................................... 100
K Loading guidelines ............................ 233
Key positions Locking
Start/Stop button .......................... 121 see Central locking
KEYLESS-GO Locking (doors)
Convenience closing feature ............ 82 Automatic ........................................ 76
Deactivation ..................................... 70 Emergency locking ........................... 76
Locking ............................................ 70 From inside (central locking but-
Unlocking ......................................... 70 ton) .................................................. 75
Kickdown Locking centrally
Driving tips .................................... 133 see Central locking
Manual gearshifting ....................... 137 Locking verification signal (on-
Knee bag .............................................. 45 board computer) ............................... 185
Low-beam headlamps
L Display message ............................ 199
Replacing bulbs ............................. 104
Lamps Switching on/off ........................... 100
see Warning and indicator lamps Lumbar support
Lane Keeping Assist Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Activating/deactivating (on- port .................................................. 92
board computer) ............................ 183
Display message ............................ 205 M
Function/information .................... 172
Lane Tracking package ..................... 171 M+S tires ............................................ 284
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 186 Malfunction message
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat see Display messages
anchors ................................................ 56 Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
License plate lamp (display mes- tions) .................................................. 261
sage) ................................................... 200 mbrace
Light function, active Call priority .................................... 245
Display message ............................ 201 Display message ............................ 194
Light sensor (display message) ....... 201 Downloading destinations
Lights (COMAND) ..................................... 245
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 101 Downloading routes ....................... 248
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 99 Emergency call .............................. 243
Fogged up headlamps .................... 102 General notes ................................ 242
Hazard warning lamps ................... 101 Geo fencing ................................... 248
Index 13
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 247 Securing the vehicle against roll-
MB info call button ........................ 244 ing away ........................................ 302
Remote fault diagnosis .................. 247 MP3
Remote vehicle locking .................. 247 Operation ....................................... 180
Roadside assistance button ........... 244 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Search & Send ............................... 246 ual .................................................. 227
Self-test ......................................... 242 Multifunction display
Speed alert .................................... 248 Function/notes ............................. 176
System .......................................... 242 Permanent display ......................... 184
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 249 Multifunction steering wheel
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 246 Operating the on-board computer .. 175
Mechanical key Overview .......................................... 33
Function/notes ................................ 71 Music files
Inserting .......................................... 71 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Locking vehicle ................................ 76 ual .................................................. 227
Removing ......................................... 71
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 76 N
Memory card (audio) ......................... 180
Navigation
Memory function ................................. 97
Entering a destination .................... 229
Message memory (on-board com-
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 178
puter) .................................................. 188
Messages
ual .................................................. 227
see Display messages Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
Mirror turn signal
cle ....................................................... 120
Cleaning ......................................... 262
Mirrors
O
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror Occupant Classification System
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) (OCS)
Mobile phone Conditions ....................................... 47
Connecting (Bluetooth® inter- Faults ............................................... 50
face) .............................................. 230 Operation ......................................... 47
Connecting another mobile System self-test ............................... 49
phone ............................................ 232 Occupant safety
Frequencies ................................... 307 Air bags ........................................... 44
Installation ..................................... 307 Automatic measures after an acci-
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 180 dent ................................................. 53
Transmission output (maximum) .... 307 Children in the vehicle ..................... 53
Modifying the programming Important safety notes .................... 39
(SmartKey) ........................................... 71 Introduction to the restraint sys-
MOExtended tires .............................. 267 tem .................................................. 39
Mounting wheels Occupant Classification System
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 305 (OCS) ............................................... 46
Mounting a new wheel ................... 304 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 302 lamps ............................................... 40
Raising the vehicle ......................... 303 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 59
Removing a wheel .......................... 304 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 40
Seat belt .......................................... 40
14 Index
OCS P
Conditions ....................................... 47
Faults ............................................... 50 Paint code number ............................ 308
Operation ......................................... 47 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 260
System self-test ............................... 49 Panic alarm .......................................... 39
Odometer ........................................... 177 Panorama roof with power tilt/
On-board computer sliding panel
AMG menu ..................................... 185 Important safety notes .................... 84
Assistance graphic menu ............... 182 Operating ......................................... 85
Assistance menu ........................... 182 Operating the roller sunblinds for
Audio menu ................................... 180 the sliding sunroof ........................... 86
Convenience submenu .................. 185 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 88
Display messages .......................... 188 Reversing feature ............................. 85
Displaying a service message ........ 258 Parking
Factory settings ............................. 185 Important safety notes .................. 140
Important safety notes .................. 174 Parking brake ................................ 141
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 183 Parking position for the exterior
Lighting submenu .......................... 184 mirror on the front-passenger
Menu overview .............................. 177 side .................................................. 97
Message memory .......................... 188 Rear view camera .......................... 166
Navigation menu ............................ 178 Parking aid
Operation ....................................... 175 see Exterior mirrors
RACETIMER ................................... 186 see Rear view camera
Service menu ................................. 183 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Settings menu ............................... 183 Deactivating/activating ................. 161
Standard display ............................ 177 Driving system ............................... 160
Telephone menu ............................ 180 Function/notes ............................. 160
Trip menu ...................................... 177 Important safety notes .................. 160
Vehicle submenu ........................... 184 Problems (malfunctions) ................ 162
Video DVD operation ..................... 180 Sensor range ................................. 160
Opening and closing the side trim Warning display ............................. 161
panels ................................................. 105 Parking brake
Operating safety Applying automatically ................... 142
Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Applying or releasing manually ...... 141
Important safety notes .................... 26 Display message ............................ 191
Operating system Electric parking brake .................... 141
see On-board computer Emergency braking ........................ 142
Operation General notes ................................ 141
Digital Operator's Manual ................ 22 Releasing automatically ................. 142
Operator's Manual Warning lamp ................................. 222
Vehicle equipment ........................... 24 Parking lamps
Outside temperature display ........... 174 Switching on/off ........................... 100
Overhead control panel ...................... 38 Parking Pilot
Override feature Canceling ....................................... 166
Rear side windows ........................... 59 Detecting parking spaces .............. 163
Display Message ............................ 206
Exiting a parking space .................. 165
Function/notes ............................. 162
Index 15
Important safety notes .................. 162 Rain closing feature (panorama

Parking .......................................... 164 roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 86
PASSENGER AIR BAG Reading lamp ..................................... 102
Display message ............................ 197 Rear compartment
Indicator lamps ................................ 40 Setting the air vents ...................... 119
Problem (malfunction) ................... 197 Rear fog lamp
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 59 Display message ............................ 200
Phone book Replacing bulbs ............................. 105
see also Digital Operator's Man- Switching on/off ........................... 100
ual .................................................. 227 Rear lamps
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- see Lights
tions) .................................................. 263 Rear seats
Power washers .................................. 260 Folding the backrest forwards/
Power windows back ............................................... 236
see Side windows Rear view camera
Protection against theft "Reverse parking" function ............ 168
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 67 Cleaning instructions ..................... 262
Immobilizer ...................................... 67 Display in the multimedia system .. 167
Protection of the environment Function/notes ............................. 166
General notes .................................. 23 General notes ................................ 166
Pulling away Switching on/off ........................... 167
Automatic transmission ................. 124 Rear window defroster
General notes ................................ 124 Problem (malfunction) ................... 118
Hill start assist ............................... 124 Switching on/off ........................... 118
Rear-view mirror
Q Anti-glare (manual) .......................... 95
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 96
QR code Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 tem)
Rescue card ..................................... 28 Important safety notes .................. 313
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27 Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 32
R Important safety notes .................. 137
RACE START Refueling process .......................... 138
Important safety notes .................. 157 see Fuel
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehi- Remote control
cles) .................................................... 157 Garage door opener ....................... 249
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 186 Programming (garage door
Radio opener) .......................................... 249
Selecting a station ......................... 180 Replacing bulbs
see separate operating instructions Brake lamp .................................... 105
Radio mode High-beam headlamps ................... 105
see also Digital Operator's Man- Important safety notes .................. 103
ual .................................................. 227 Installing/removing the cover
Radio-wave reception/transmis- (front wheel arch) .......................... 104
sion in the vehicle Low-beam headlamps .................... 104
Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Overview of bulb types .................. 103
Rear fog lamp ................................ 105
16 Index
Turn signals (front) ......................... 105 Search & Send

Turn signals (rear) .......................... 105 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Reporting safety defects .................... 27 ual .................................................. 227
Rescue card ......................................... 28 Seat belts
Reserve (fuel tank) Adjusting the height ......................... 43
see Fuel Cleaning ......................................... 264
Reserve fuel Correct usage .................................. 42
Display message ............................ 204 Fastening ......................................... 43
Warning lamp ................................. 222 Important safety guidelines ............. 41
see Fuel Introduction ..................................... 40
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 118 Releasing ......................................... 43
Restraint system Warning lamp ................................. 216
Display message ............................ 195 Warning lamp (function) ................... 43
Introduction ..................................... 39 Seats
Warning lamp ................................. 222 Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 91
Warning lamp (function) ................... 40 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 90
Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 131 Adjusting (Performance Seat) .......... 93
Reversing feature Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 85 port .................................................. 92
Roller sunblind ................................. 86 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 91
Side windows ................................... 81 Cleaning the cover ......................... 264
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 25 Correct driver's seat position ........... 89
Roller sunblind Folding the backrest (rear com-
Panorama roof with power tilt/ partment) forwards/back .............. 236
sliding panel ..................................... 86 Important safety notes .................... 89
Roof carrier ........................................ 238 Seat heating problem ...................... 94
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Storing settings (memory func-
guidelines) ......................................... 265 tion) ................................................. 98
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 314 Switching seat heating on/off ......... 93
Route guidance Securing cargo .................................. 237
see also Digital Operator's Man- Selector lever
ual .................................................. 227 Cleaning ......................................... 264
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 262
S Service menu (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 183
Safety Service message
Children in the vehicle ..................... 53 see ASSYST PLUS
see Occupant safety Service products
Safety system Brake fluid ..................................... 312
see Driving safety systems Coolant (engine) ............................ 312
SD card Engine oil ....................................... 311
Inserting ........................................ 232 Fuel ................................................ 309
Inserting/removing ........................ 232 Important safety notes .................. 309
Removing ....................................... 232 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
SD memory card tem) ............................................... 313
see also Digital Operator's Man- Washer fluid ................................... 313
ual .................................................. 227 Setting the air distribution ............... 115
Index 17
Setting the airflow ............................ 116 SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 121
Setting the date/time format SMS
see also Digital Operator's Man- see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 227 ual .................................................. 227
Setting the language Snow chains ...................................... 285
see also Digital Operator's Man- Sockets
ual .................................................. 227 Center console .............................. 241
Setting the time General notes ................................ 241
see also Digital Operator's Man- Rear compartment ......................... 242
ual .................................................. 227 Trunk ............................................. 242
Settings Sound
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 185 Switching on/off ........................... 228
On-board computer ....................... 183 Special seat belt retractor .................. 54
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 186 Specialist workshop ............................ 27
Side impact air bag ............................. 45 Speed, controlling
Side marker lamp (display mes- see Cruise control
sage) ................................................... 201 Speedometer
Side windows Activating/deactivating the addi-
Cleaning ......................................... 261 tional speedometer ........................ 184
Convenience closing feature ............ 82 Digital ............................................ 178
Convenience opening feature .......... 82 In the Instrument cluster ................. 32
Important safety information ........... 80 Segments ...................................... 174
Opening/closing .............................. 81 Selecting the display unit ............... 183
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 83 SPORT handling mode
Resetting ......................................... 83 Deactivating/activating
Reversing feature ............................. 81 (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 65
SIRIUS services Warning lamp ................................. 220
see also Digital Operator's Man- Standing lamps
ual .................................................. 227 Display message ............................ 200
Sliding sunroof Switching on/off ........................... 100
see Panorama roof with power Start-off assist
tilt/sliding panel Activating ....................................... 157
SmartKey Important safety notes .................. 157
Changing the battery ....................... 72 Start/Stop button
Changing the programming ............. 71 Removing ....................................... 122
Checking the battery ....................... 72 Starting the engine ........................ 123
Convenience closing feature ............ 82 Start/stop function
Convenience opening feature .......... 82 see ECO start/stop function
Display message ............................ 214 Starting (engine) ................................ 122
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 69 STEER CONTROL .................................. 66
Important safety notes .................... 69 Steering
KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 70 Display message ............................ 214
Loss ................................................. 73 Steering assistant STEER CON-
Mechanical key ................................ 71 TROL
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 121 see STEER CONTROL
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 73 Steering wheel
Starting the engine ........................ 123 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 94
18 Index
Button overview ............................... 33 Tires/wheels ................................. 306

Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 175 Vehicle data ................................... 314
Cleaning ......................................... 264 Telephone
Important safety notes .................... 94 Accepting a call (multifunction
Paddle shifters ............................... 135 steering wheel) .............................. 181
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 135 Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 186 necting) ......................................... 231
Stowage compartments Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
Armrest (front) ............................... 234 eral information) ............................ 230
Armrest (under) ............................. 235 Display message ............................ 214
Center console .............................. 234 Introduction ................................... 180
Center console (rear) ..................... 235 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 180
Cup holders ................................... 238 Number from the phone book ........ 181
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 234 Redialing ........................................ 181
Glove box ....................................... 234 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 181
Important safety information ......... 233 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Map pockets .................................. 235 ual .................................................. 227
Stowage net ................................... 235 Switching between mobile
Under driver's seat/front- phones ........................................... 232
passenger seat .............................. 235 Temperature
Stowage net ....................................... 235 Coolant .......................................... 175
Stowage well beneath the trunk Coolant (on-board computer,
floor .................................................... 237 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 185
Summer tires ..................................... 284 Engine oil (on-board computer,
Sun visor ............................................ 240 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 185
Suspension Outside temperature ...................... 174
Adaptive Damping System ............. 159 Setting (climate control) ................ 115
Suspension setting Transmission oil (on-board com-
AMG adaptive sport suspension puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 185
system ........................................... 158 Through-loading feature ................... 236
Switching air-recirculation mode Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 186
on/off ................................................. 118 Tire pressure
Switching on media mode Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 289
Via the device list .......................... 232 Checking manually ........................ 288
Display message ............................ 209
T Maximum ....................................... 288
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 269
Tachometer ........................................ 174 Notes ............................................. 287
Tail lamps Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 270
Display message ............................ 200 Recommended ............................... 285
see Lights Tire pressure loss warning system
Tank General notes ................................ 288
see Fuel tank Important safety notes .................. 288
Tank content Restarting ...................................... 289
Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Tire pressure monitor
Technical data Checking the tire pressure elec-
Capacities ...................................... 309 tronically ........................................ 291
Information .................................... 307 Function/notes ............................. 289
Index 19
General notes ................................ 289 Maximum load on a tire (defini-

Important safety notes .................. 290 tion) ............................................... 300
Radio type approval for the tire Maximum loaded vehicle weight
pressure monitor ........................... 292 (definition) ..................................... 300
Restarting ...................................... 291 Maximum permissible tire pres-
Warning lamp ................................. 226 sure (definition) ............................. 300
Warning message .......................... 291 Maximum tire load ......................... 298
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 268 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 300
Important safety notes .................. 268 MOExtended tires .......................... 284
Storage location ............................ 266 Optional equipment weight (defi-
Tire pressure not reached .............. 269 nition) ............................................ 301
Tire pressure reached .................... 270 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-
Tires inition) ........................................... 301
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 301 Replacing ....................................... 301
Average weight of the vehicle Service life ..................................... 283
occupants (definition) .................... 299 Sidewall (definition) ....................... 301
Bar (definition) ............................... 299 Speed rating (definition) ................ 300
Changing a wheel .......................... 301 Storing ........................................... 302
Characteristics .............................. 299 Structure and characteristics
Checking ........................................ 282 (definition) ..................................... 299
Curb weight (definition) ................. 300 Summer tires ................................. 284
Definition of terms ......................... 299 Temperature .................................. 296
Direction of rotation ...................... 302 TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Display message ............................ 209 (definition) ..................................... 301
Distribution of the vehicle occu- Tire bead (definition) ...................... 301
pants (definition) ............................ 301 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 301
DOT (Department of Transporta- Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 300
tion) (definition) ............................. 299 Tire size (data) ............................... 306
DOT, Tire Identification Number Tire size designation, load-bearing
(TIN) ............................................... 299 capacity, speed rating .................... 296
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Tire tread ....................................... 283
(definition) ..................................... 300 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 301
General notes ................................ 306 Total load limit (definition) ............. 301
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- Traction ......................................... 295
inition) ........................................... 300 Traction (definition) ....................... 301
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- Tread wear ..................................... 295
ing) (definition) .............................. 300 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Important safety notes .................. 282 Standards ...................................... 295
Increased vehicle weight due to Uniform Tire Quality Grading
optional equipment (definition) ...... 300 Standards (definition) .................... 300
Information on driving .................... 282 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 301
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 300 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 300
Labeling (overview) ........................ 296 see Flat tire
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 301 Top Tether ............................................ 56
Load index ..................................... 298 Tow-starting
Load index (definition) ................... 300 Emergency engine starting ............ 279
M+S tires ....................................... 284 Important safety notes .................. 276
Installing the towing eye ................ 277
20 Index
Removing the towing eye ............... 277 Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 105
Towing a trailer Switching on/off ........................... 100
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Two-way radio
gram) ............................................... 66 Frequencies ................................... 307
Towing away Installation ..................................... 307
Important safety guidelines ........... 276 Transmission output (maximum) .... 307
Installing the towing eye ................ 277 Type identification plate
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 279 see Vehicle identification plate
Removing the towing eye ............... 277
Transporting the vehicle ................ 278 U
With both axles on the ground ....... 278 Unlocking
With front axle raised ..................... 277
Emergency unlocking ....................... 76
Towing eye ......................................... 266
From inside the vehicle (central
Traffic reports
unlocking button) ............................. 75
see also Digital Operator's Man- Upshift indicator (on-board com-
ual .................................................. 227 puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 185
Transmission
USB devices
see Automatic transmission
Connecting to the Media Inter-
Transmission position display
face ............................................... 232
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 129
Transporting the vehicle .................. 278
V
Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 264 Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 240
Trip computer (on-board com- Vehicle
puter) .................................................. 177 Correct use ...................................... 27
Trip odometer Data acquisition ............................... 28
Calling up ....................................... 177 Display message ............................ 211
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 178 Equipment ....................................... 24
Trunk Individual settings .......................... 183
Emergency release .......................... 80 Limited Warranty ............................. 28
Emergency release button ............... 80 Loading .......................................... 292
Important safety notes .................... 77 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 76
Opening (automatically from out- Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 69
side) ................................................. 78 Lowering ........................................ 305
Opening (from outside the vehi- Maintenance .................................... 25
cle, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .............. 78 Parking for a long period ................ 142
Opening automatically from Pulling away ................................... 124
inside ............................................... 79 Raising ........................................... 303
Opening/closing (manually from Reporting problems ......................... 27
outside) ............................................ 77 Securing from rolling away ............ 302
Trunk emergency release button ....... 80 Transporting .................................. 278
Trunk lid Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 76
Display message ............................ 213 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 69
Opening dimensions ...................... 314 Vehicle data ................................... 314
Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 314 Vehicle data
Turn signals Roof load (maximum) ..................... 314
Display message ............................ 199 Trunk load (maximum) ................... 314
Index 21
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 314 Cleaning ......................................... 261

Vehicle emergency locking ................ 76 Important safety notes .................. 282
Vehicle identification number Information on driving .................... 282
see VIN Interchanging/changing ................ 301
Vehicle identification plate .............. 308 Mounting a new wheel ................... 304
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 266 Removing a wheel .......................... 304
Ventilation Storing ........................................... 302
Setting the vents ........................... 119 Tightening torque ........................... 305
Video Wheel size/tire size ....................... 306
Operating the DVD ......................... 180 Window curtain air bag
see also Digital Operator's Man- Display message ............................ 196
ual .................................................. 227 Operation ......................................... 46
VIN Windows
Seat ............................................... 309 see Side windows
Type plate ...................................... 308 Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 116
W Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 257
Warning and indicator lamps Important safety notes .................. 313
ABS ................................................ 218 Windshield wipers
Active Brake Assist ........................ 225 Display message ............................ 214
Brakes ........................................... 217 Problem (malfunction) ................... 108
Check Engine ................................. 222 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 107
Coolant .......................................... 223 Switching on/off ........................... 106
Distance warning ........................... 225 Winter driving
ESP® .............................................. 219 Slippery road surfaces ................... 147
ESP® OFF ....................................... 220 Snow chains .................................. 285
Fuel tank ........................................ 222 Winter operation
Overview .......................................... 32 General notes ................................ 284
PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 40 Winter tires
Reserve fuel ................................... 222 M+S tires ....................................... 284
Restraint system ............................ 222 Wiper blades
Seat belt ........................................ 216 Cleaning ......................................... 262
SPORT handling mode ................... 220 Important safety notes .................. 107
Tire pressure monitor .................... 226 Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
Warranty .............................................. 24 tions) .................................................. 264
Washer fluid Workshop
Display message ............................ 214 see Qualified specialist workshop
Weather display (COMAND)
see also Digital Operator's Man- Z
ual .................................................. 227
Wheel and tire combinations ZONE function
Tires ............................................... 306 Switching on/off ........................... 116
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 305
Wheel chock ...................................... 302
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 301
Checking ........................................ 282
22 Digital Operator's Manual
Introduction Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

ual
The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-
mation about the safe operation of your vehicle. General notes
The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre-
Please observe the information about the oper-
hensive and specifically adapted information on
ation of the controller (Y page 228).
your vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-
tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man-
ual via the multimedia system. Content pages
i You will not incur any costs when calling up The content pages can be accessed by means of
the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital a visual search, a keyword search or using the
Operator's Manual works without connecting contents.
to the Internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of the
Digital Operator's Manual:
RVisual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can
access many of the different topics covered
by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access
the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-
cle interior" view.
RKeyword search
X To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3
The keyword search allows you to search for a
the controller.
keyword by entering characters.
X To display in full-screen or animation: slide
RContents
8 the controller to the left :.
You can select individual sections in the con-
X To select information texts or save book-
tents.
marks: slide 9 the controller to the
i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva- right ;.
ted for safety reasons while driving. X To select a link: slide 6 the controller
downwards =.
X To exit a content page: select % sym-
Operation bol ?.
X To call up the basic menu of the Digital
Calling up the Digital Operator's Man- Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A.
ual
X To switch functions to the multimedia
X Press the Ø button in the center console. system using the buttons on the center
The overview relating to the vehicle appears. console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø
X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by button.
turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-
X Confirm 7 the message about the warning
ator's Manual remains open in the back-
and safety notes. ground.
The basic menu for the Digital Operator's
Manual appears.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 23
Protecting the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Introduction
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations
that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the Operator's Manual requires you to
and humanity into account. dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-
You too can help to protect the environment use them. Observe the relevant environmental
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- rules and regulations when disposing of materi-
als. In this way you will help to protect the envi-
tally responsible manner.
ronment.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors: Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Roperating conditions of your vehicle
Ryour personal driving style H Environmental note
You can influence both factors. You should Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
bear the following in mind: assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions: quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
parts.
sumption.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
are correct. ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
the following areas of your vehicle:
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
Rdoors
them. Rdoor pillars
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute Rdoor sills
to environmental protection. You should Rseats
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rcockpit
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rinstrument cluster
qualified specialist workshop. Rcenter console
Personal driving style: Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
starting the engine. efficiency of the restraint systems.
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
is stationary. qualified specialist workshop.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance You could jeopardize the operating safety of
from the vehicle in front. your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and well as accessories relevant to safety which
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
braking.
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant
Z
24 Service and vehicle operation
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu- tions in the Service and Warranty Information
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual- booklet.
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
have been specifically approved for your vehi-
Introduction
replace and repair all factory-installed parts in

cle. accordance with the following warranty terms
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to and conditions:
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
cifically developed, manufactured or selected
REmission System Warranty
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts REmission Performance Warranty
should be used. RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
More than 300,000 different genuine setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for and Vermont Emission Control System War-
Mercedes-Benz models. ranty
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for laws)
necessary service and repair work. In addition, Replacement parts and accessories are covered
strategically located parts delivery centers pro- by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
vide quick and reliable parts service. warranties. These are available at any author-
Always specify the vehicle identification number ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz i Should you lose your Service and Warranty
parts (Y page 308). Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-
ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-
Operator's Manual mation booklet will be posted to you.
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator's Manual describes all models Information for customers in Califor-
and all standard and optional equipment of nia
your vehicle available at the time of going to
print. Country-specific differences are possi- Under California law you may be entitled to a
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
feature all functions described here. This also purchase price or lease price, if after a reason-
applies to safety-relevant systems and func- able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service
therefore differ from that shown in the facilities fail to fix one or more substantial
descriptions and illustrations. defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are
covered by its express warranty.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys- During the period of 18 months from original
tems installed in your vehicle. delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of
Should you have any questions concerning 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the
equipment and operation, please consult an odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book- sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more
let are important documents and should be kept of the following occurs:
in the vehicle. (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction
results in a condition that is likely to cause
death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is
Service and vehicle operation driven, that defect or malfunction has been
subject to repair two or more times, and you
Warranty
The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in
accordance with the warranty terms and condi-
Service and vehicle operation 25
have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, (USA) at the hotline number

LLC in writing of the need for its repair. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-
Introduction
of a less serious nature than category (1)
has been subject to repair four or more ing you in a timely manner should the need arise.
times and you have directly notified If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-
Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the
repair. next owner.
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of If you have purchased a used car, please send us
repair of the same or different substantial the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
total of more than 30 calendar days. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Please send your written notice to: (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Assistance Center Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
3 Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Vehicle operation outside the USA
and Canada
Maintenance When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe

the following points:
Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you RService facilities or replacement parts may
when taking the vehicle to an authorized not be readily available.
Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
advisor will enter every service into your Main-
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
tenance Booklet on your behalf.
can cause damage to the catalytic converter.
RThe fuel may have a considerably lower
octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause
Roadside Assistance engine damage.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for
gram offers technical help in the event of a delivery in Europe through our European Deliv-
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis- ery Program. For details, consult an authorized
tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the
hours a day, 365 days a year. following addresses.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) In the USA
(USA) Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
1-800-387-0100(Canada) European Delivery Department
For additional information, refer to the One Mercedes Drive
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty Booklet In Canada
(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu- Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
ment wallet. European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Change of address or change of own-
ership
In the event of a change of address, please send
us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Z
26 Operating safety
Operating safety ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:

Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
Important safety notes curb or an unpaved road
Introduction
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a

G WARNING
curb, speed bumps or a pothole in the road
If you do not have the prescribed service/ Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
maintenance work or any required repairs parts of the chassis
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or In situations like this, the body, the under-
system failures. There is a risk of an accident. body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
Always have the prescribed service/mainte- damaged without the damage being visible.
nance work as well as any required repairs Components damaged in this way can unex-
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
longer withstand the strain they are designed
to.
G WARNING If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with twigs can gather between the underbody and
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk the underbody paneling. If these materials
of fire. come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
system, they can catch fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, In such situations, have the vehicle checked
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
particular, remove parts of plants or other cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
flammable materials which have become ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
qualified specialist workshop. paying attention to road and traffic condi-
tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
G WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their Declarations of conformity
function and/or the function of other net-
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-
worked components. In particular, systems
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a subject to the two following two conditions: 1)
result, these may no longer function as inten- These devices may not cause harmful interfer-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of ence, and 2) These devices must accept any
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an interference received, including interference
accident and injury. that may cause undesired operation. Changes
or modifications not expressly approved by the
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- party responsible for compliance could void the
tronic components or their software. You user’s authority to operate the equipment."
should have all work to electrical and elec- Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
specialist workshop. RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may
not cause interference, and (2) These devices
must accept any interference, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation of
the device."
Operating safety 27
Diagnostics connection Always have the following work carried out at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
The diagnostics connection is only intended for Rwork relevant to safety
the connection of diagnostic equipment at a
Introduction
qualified specialist workshop. Rservice and maintenance work
Rrepair work
G WARNING Ralterations, installation work and modifica-
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics tions
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the Rwork on electronic components
operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
operating safety of the vehicle could be affec-
ted. There is a risk of an accident. Correct use
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con- If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-
nection in the vehicle, which is approved for ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving
G WARNING your vehicle:
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the Rthe safety notes in this manual
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. Rtechnical data for the vehicle
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is Rtraffic rules and regulations
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are vehicles
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure Problems with your vehicle
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use If you should experience a problem with your
loose floormats and do not place floormats on vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
top of one another. affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-
! If the engine is switched off and equipment ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-
on the diagnostics connection is used, the fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-
starter battery may discharge. isfaction, please discuss the problem again with
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec-
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con- essary, contact us at one of the following
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor- addresses.
mation being reset, for example. This may lead In the USA
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
the next emissions test during the main inspec- Customer Assistance Center
tion. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
3 Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Qualified specialist workshop In Canada
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali- Customer Relations Department
fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
correctly carry out the work required on your Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-
evant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Reporting safety defects
USA only:
Z
28 Data stored in the vehicle
The following text is reproduced as required of Data stored in the vehicle

all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the Data storage
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
Introduction
1966. A wide range of electronic components in your

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect vehicle contain data memories.
which could cause a crash or could cause injury These data memories temporarily or perma-
or death, you should immediately inform the nently store technical information about:
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Rthe vehicle's operating state
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz Rincidents
USA, LLC.
Rmalfunctions
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety In general, this technical information docu-
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order ments the state of a component, a module, a
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA system or the surroundings.
cannot become involved in individual problems These include, for example:
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz Roperating conditions of system components,
USA, LLC. e.g. fluid levels
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 individual components, e.g. number of wheel
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, position
DC 20590. Rmalfunctions and defects in important system
You can also obtain other information about components, e.g. lights, brakes
motor vehicle safety from Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in
http://www.safercar.gov special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-
ment, intervention of stability control sys-
tems
Limited Warranty Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature
This data is of an exclusively technical nature
! Follow the instructions in this manual about and can be used to:
the proper operation of your vehicle as well as
about possible vehicle damage. Damage to Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-
your vehicle that arises from culpable contra- tions and defects
ventions against these instructions is not cov- Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
ered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited dent
Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War- Roptimize vehicle functions
ranty.
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
QR codes for the rescue card mation can be read from the event data memory
and malfunction data memory.
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap Services include, for example:
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
event of an accident, rescue services can use Rrepair services
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res- Rservice processes
cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue Rwarranties
card contains the most important information Rquality assurance
about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the
routing of the electric cables. The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-
vice network (including the manufacturer) using
You can find more information under special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. mation is obtained from it, if required.
Data stored in the vehicle 29
After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor- RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
mation is deleted from the malfunction memory accelerator and/or brake pedal and
or is continually overwritten. RHow fast the vehicle was traveling.
Introduction
When operating the vehicle, situations are con- These data can help provide a better under-
ceivable in which this technical data, in connec- standing of the circumstances in which crashes
tion with other information (if necessary, under and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded
consultation with an authorized expert), could by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-
be traced to a person. tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
Examples include: under normal driving conditions and no personal
Raccident reports data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as
Rdamage to the vehicle
law enforcement could combine the EDR data
Rwitness statements with the type of personally identifying data rou-
Further additional functions that have been con- tinely acquired during a crash investigation.
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi- to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and
cle as well. The additional functions include, for special equipment is required. In addition to the
example, vehicle location in case of an emer- vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
gency. the special equipment, such as law enforce-
ment, can read the information by accessing the
vehicle or the EDR.
COMAND/mbrace EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit- data from the EDR is commercially available,
uations, and the location of the vehicle may be Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys- disclaims any and all liability arising from the
tem. extraction of this information by unauthorized
For additional information please refer to the Mercedes-Benz personnel.
COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi- without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
tions. the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
Event data recorders ment; by federal, state or local government; in
connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
This vehicle is equipped with an event data ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an as required by law.
event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near Warning: The EDR is a component of the
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy- Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-
performed. The EDR is designed to record data tem Module and other systems.
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
or less. This means that in the event of such conflict, the
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
such data as: 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
RHow various systems in your vehicle were
operating
RWhether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened
Z
30 Information on copyright
Information on copyright
General information
Introduction
Information on license for free and open-source

software used in your vehicle and its electronic
components is available on the following web-
site:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Registered trademarks
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG Inc.
RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-
son Controls.
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman
International Industries.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
Cockpit 31
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Steering wheel paddle shift- D Climate control systems 109
ers 135
E Ignition lock 121
; Combination switch 100
F Adjusts the steering wheel 94
= Instrument cluster 32
G Cruise control lever 148
? Horn
H Electric parking brake 141
A DIRECT SELECT lever 129
I Light switch 99
B Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
warning display 161 J Diagnostics connection 27
C Overhead control panel 38 K Opens the hood 254

32 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance

: Speedometer with segments 174 ; #! Turn signals 100
Warning and indicator lamps: = Multifunction display 176
L Low-beam headlamps 100
T Parking lamps 100 ? Tachometer 174
K High-beam headlamps 100 6 Restraint system 40
÷ ESP® 219 ü Seat belt not fastened 216
Electric parking brake M SPORT handling mode
applied (red) (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 220
F (USA only) R Rear fog lamp 100
! (Canada only) 222 ; Check Engine 222
! Electric parking brake h Tire pressure monitor 226
(yellow) 222 A Coolant temperature gauge 175
· Distance warning 225 Warning and indicator lamps:
å ESP® OFF 219 ? Coolant too hot/cold 223
! ABS malfunctioning 218
B Fuel level indicator
Brakes 217
Warning and indicator lamps:
$ (USA only)
æ Reserve fuel 222
J (Canada only)
Multifunction steering wheel 33
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 176 ? ò Opens the menu list
; Multimedia system display 9 : Selects a menu
a Confirms the selection
= ~ Rejects or ends a call % Back
6 Makes or accepts a call Operates the on-board com-
Further telephone functions 180 puter 175
W X Adjusts volume ? Switches off voice-
8 Mute operated control of the navi-
? Switches on voice- gation system or the Voice
operated control of the navi- Control System
gation system or the Voice
Control System
i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20 i In vehicles with multimedia system

you can find further information: COMAND you can find further information:
Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Ron the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual Operator's Manual
Ron voice-operated control of the navigation Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in
system in the manufacturer's operating the Digital Operator's Manual
instructions Ron the Voice Control System in the sepa-
rate operating instructions
34 Center console
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance

: Multimedia system (see the ? è ECO start/stop func-
separate operating instruction 124
tions)
A £ Hazard warning lamps 101
; c Seat heating 93
B PASSENGER AIR BAG indica-
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
tor lamp 40
AMG adaptive sport suspen-
sion system (left side) 158 C DYNAMIC SELECT button 127
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: å Mercedes-AMG vehi-
adjusts the exhaust flap of cles: ESP® 65
the AMG performance
exhaust system (right side) 126
= c Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC 161
Center console 35
Center console, lower section
At a glance
: Ashtray 240 ? Stowage compartment with
Cigarette lighter 241 Media Interface 233
Socket 241 A Multimedia system control-
Stowage compartment 233 ler (see the separate operat-
ing instructions)
; Cup holder 238
= Cup holder 238
36
At a glance Center console
i Mercedes-AMG vehicles Function Page

Function Page ? DYNAMIC SELECT controller 128
: Ashtray 240 A Cup holder 238
Cigarette lighter 241
B Stowage compartment with
Socket 241 Media Interface 233
Stowage compartment 233
C Multimedia system control-
; Selector lever 131 ler (see the separate operat-
= Manual gearshifting (perma- ing instructions)
nent setting) 135
Door control panel 37
Door control panel
At a glance
: Opens the door 75 B W Opens/closes the side
windows 81
; % & Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 75 C n Activates/deactivates
the override feature for the
= r45= Saves side windows in the rear
the seat and exterior mirror compartment 59
settings 97
D q Opens the trunk 79
? Adjusts the seats electrically 91
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exterior
mirrors in/out electrically 95
38 Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel

At a glance

: u Switches the rear com- D F Roadside assistance
partment interior lighting call button (mbrace system) 244
on/off 102
E G SOS button (mbrace
; p Switches the right- system) 243
hand reading lamp on/off 102
F Eyeglasses compartment 234
= | Switches the front inte-
rior lighting/automatic inte- G 3 Opens/closes the pan-
rior lighting control off 102 orama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel with roller sun-
? ï MB Info call button blinds 85
(mbrace system) 244
H c Switches the front inte-
A Rear-view mirror 96 rior lighting on 102
B Sets the compass 252 I p Switches the left-hand
reading lamp on/off 102
C Buttons for the garage door
opener 249
Occupant safety 39
Panic alarm As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (Y page 89).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 44).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
Safety
occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-
ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection
offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only
the air bags that increase protection in that par-
ticular accident situation are deployed. How-
X To activate: press and hold the ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not
! button : for approx. one second. protect against objects penetrating the vehicle
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the from the outside.
alarm system is armed. Information on restraint system operation can
X To deactivate: press ! button : again. be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
or Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 51).
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. For information on children traveling with you in
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see
or KEYLESS‑GO "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 53).
X Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Occupant safety Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
Introduction to the restraint system
restraint system may then not perform its
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- intended protective function and may fail in an
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even
The restraint system can also reduce the forces
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during fatal injury.
an accident. Never modify parts of the restraint system.
The restraint system comprises: Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
Rseat belt system components or their software.
Rair bags If it is necessary to modify components of the
Rchild restraint system restraint system to accommodate a person
Rchild seat securing systems with disabilities, contact an authorized
The components of the restraint system work in Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only:
conjunction with each other. They can only for further information contact our Customer
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
vehicle occupants: (1‑800‑367‑6372).
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 42) Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint
driving aids which have been approved specifi-
properly (Y page 89). cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
40 Occupant safety
Restraint system warning lamp The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
The functions of the restraint system are RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
checked after the ignition is switched on and at
onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
regular intervals while the engine is running.
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
good time.
in the event of an accident.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
Safety
switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-

then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-
dent.
nents of the restraint system are in operational
readiness. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
system warning lamp:
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
on Depending on the person in the front-passenger
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the seat, the front-passenger front air bag must
engine running either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-
Rlights up again while the engine is running lowing points. You must make sure of this both
before and during a journey.
G WARNING
RChildren in a child restraint system:
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, whether the front-passenger front air bag is
restraint system components may be trig- enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as led child restraint system, and the age and
intended during an accident. This can affect size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe
for example the Emergency Tensioning the notes on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (Y page 46) and on "Chil-
Device or the air bag. This poses an increased dren in the vehicle" (Y page 53). There you
risk of injury or even fatal injury. will also find instructions on rearward and
Have the restraint system checked and forward-facing child restraint systems on the
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as front-passenger seat.
soon as possible. RAll other persons: depending on the classi-
fication of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-
bled or deactivated (Y page 46). Be sure to
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (Y page 40) and "Air bags"
(Y page 44). There you can also find infor-
mation on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling
over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-
part of the Occupant Classification System thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
(OCS).
Occupant safety 41
occupant in the best position in relation to the injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
air bag. dent or when braking or changing direction
The seat belt system comprises: abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
RSeat belts or even fatal injury.
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat belts
ting properly.
and the outer seat belts in the rear
Safety
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
G WARNING
quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac- The seat belt does not offer the intended level
ted any further. of protection if you have not moved the back-
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close ing or in the event of an accident, you could
against the body. However it does not pull the slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
backrest.
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-
rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of injury.
an incorrectly fastened seat belt. Adjust the seat properly before beginning
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the is in an almost vertical position and that the
vehicle occupant. shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are across the center of your shoulder.
synchronized with the front air bags, which
absorb part of the deceleration force. This can G WARNING
reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-
pants during an accident. Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot
wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-
! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, tional and suitable restraint system. If the
do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of
the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-
lead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten- form its intended protective function. An
sioning Device in the event of an accident, incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
which will then need to be replaced. injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
dent or when braking or changing direction
Important safety notes abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems or even fatal injury.
is required by law in: For this reason, always secure persons under
Rall 50 states 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint
Rthe U.S. territories systems.
Rthe District of Columbia
If a child younger than twelve years old and
Rall Canadian provinces under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle vehicle:
occupants should correctly fasten their seat Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
belts before starting the journey. system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-
G WARNING cle. The child restraint system must be appro-
priate to the age, weight and size of the child
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
perform its intended protective function. An notes on "Children in the vehicle"
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause (Y page 53) in addition to the child restraint
Z
42 Occupant safety
system manufacturer's installation and oper- Only use the standard three-point seat belt.
ating instructions Never modify the seat belt system.
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system
(OCS)" (Y page 46) Proper use of the seat belts
G WARNING Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 41).
The seat belts may not perform their intended
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat
protective function if:
belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also
Safety
Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely make sure that all vehicle occupants are always
dirty, bleached or dyed wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
is in motion.
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
When fastening the seat belt, always make sure
extremely dirty that:
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt
anchorages or inertia reels have been modi- buckle belonging to that seat.
fied. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
although the damage may not be visible, e.g. coat.
due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Only then can the forces which occur be dis-
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices tributed over the area of the belt.
could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always
when necessary. This poses an increased risk routed across the center of your shoulder.
of injury or even fatal injury. The shoulder section of the belt must not
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- come into contact with your neck or be routed
under your arm. Where possible, adjust the
sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia
seat belt to the appropriate height.
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- possible across your lap.
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked The lap belt must always be routed across
immediately at a qualified specialist work- your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
shop. This applies particularly to pregnant women.
If necessary, push the lap belt down to your
Only use seat belts that have been approved for hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. section of the belt.
Sports seat or AMG Performance seat: this Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-
seat is designed for the standard three-point ted or fragile objects.
seat belt. If you install another multi-point seat If you have such items located on or in your
belt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, the restraint clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store
system cannot provide the best level of protec- these in a suitable place.
tion. Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time.
G WARNING Infants and children must never travel sitting
If you feed seat belts through the opening in on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event
of an accident, they could be crushed
the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
damaged or may even break in the event of an Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
accident. This poses an increased risk of the seat belt is also being used by one of the
injury or even fatal injury. vehicle's occupants.
Also ensure that there are never objects
between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.
Occupant safety 43
Seat belts are only intended to secure and Releasing seat belts
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug- ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.
gage or loads (Y page 233). Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts This could damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt can no longer fulfill their protective function
(Y page 41) and the notes on correct use of seat and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-
belts (Y page 42). cialist workshop.
Safety
X Press the release button in the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt
back.
Belt warning for the driver and front

passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up
continuously or flash. In addition, there may be
a warning tone.
Basic illustration Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has
X Adjust the seat (Y page 89). already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-
The seat backrest must be in an almost vering lamp lights up for six seconds each time the
tical position. engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver
or front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-
tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat
let. belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-
X Engage seat belt tongue ; in belt buckle :. er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt belt warning lamp goes out.
across your body. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the
The shoulder section of the seat belt must engine is started, an additional warning tone will
always be routed across the center of the shoul- sound. The warning tone switches off after six
der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-
tened.
X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
The belt outlet will engage in various posi- (25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
tions. passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning
X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with
belt outlet downwards. increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the
X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired driver or front passenger have fastened their
position and make sure that the belt outlet seat belts.
engages. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to ing is activated again.
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
vehicle. Further information can be found under
"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 54).
Z
44 Occupant safety
Air bags door or side window. You may otherwise be in

the deployment area of the air bags.
Introduction RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front
of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-
The installation point of an air bag can be rec- board, for example. Your feet may otherwise
ognized by the AIR BAG symbol. be in the deployment area of the air bag.
An air bag complements the correctly fastened RFor this reason, always secure persons less
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-
air bag provides additional protection in appli- tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot
cable accident situations.
Safety
be worn correctly.
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
different air bag systems function independ- observe the following notes:
ently from one another (Y page 51).
RAlways secure children under twelve years of
However, no system available today can com-
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable
child restraint systems.
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
RChild restraint systems should be installed on
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
which the air bag must be deployed. the rear seats.
ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
Important safety notes when the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
G WARNING indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-
If you do not sit in the correct seat position, passenger front air bag is deactivated
the air bag cannot protect as intended and (Y page 40).
could even cause additional injury when RAlways observe the instructions and safety
deployed. This poses an increased risk of notes on the "Occupant Classification System
injury or even fatal injury. (OCS)" (Y page 46) and on "Children in the
vehicle" (Y page 53) in addition to the child
To avoid hazardous situations, always make restraint system manufacturer's installation
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: and operating instructions.
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent
including pregnant women an air bag from functioning correctly. Before
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great- from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make
est possible distance to the air bags sure that:
Rfollow the following instructions Rthere are no people, animals or objects
Always make sure that there are no objects between the vehicle occupants and an air
between the air bag and the vehicle's occu- bag.
pants. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar.
RAdjust the seats properly before beginning Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on
your journey. Always make sure that the seat the grab handles or coat hooks.
is in an almost upright position. The center of Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
the head restraint must support the head at attached to the vehicle within the deployment
about eye level. area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,
RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats rear side trim or side walls.
as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi- Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in
tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. the pockets of your clothing. Store such
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. objects in a suitable place.
This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.
RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-
ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against the
Occupant safety 45
G WARNING When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-

tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects pants in the front seats.
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
function correctly. There is an increased risk informs you about the status of the front-
of injury. passenger front air bag (Y page 40).
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects The front-passenger front air bag will only
to it. deploy if:
Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor
Safety
G WARNING readings, detects that the front-passenger
seat is occupied (Y page 46). The
Sensors to control the air bags are located in
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
the doors. Modifications or work not per- not lit (Y page 47)
formed correctly to the doors or door panel- Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the high accident severity
function of the sensors being impaired. The air
bags might therefore not function properly Knee bags
anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Front air bags

! Do not place heavy objects on the front-
passenger seat. This could cause the system Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering
to identify the seat as being occupied. In the column and front-passenger knee bag ; under
event of an accident, the restraint systems on the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger
the front-passenger side may be triggered knee bags are triggered together with the front
and have to be replaced. air bags.
The driver's and front-passenger knee bags
offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-
tection for the occupants in the front seats.
Side impact air bags

G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-
vent deployment of the air bags integrated
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. In addition, the operation of
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer- the occupant classification system (OCS)
ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ; could be adversely affected. This poses an
deploys in front of and above the glove box.
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Z
46 Occupant safety
You should only use seat covers that have Window curtain air bags
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Safety
Window curtain air bags : are integrated into

the side of the roof frame and deployed in the
area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
Front side impact air bags : and rear side When deployed, the window curtain air bag
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bol- enhances the level of protection for the head.
ster of the seat backrest. However, it does not protect the chest or arms.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers In the event of a side impact, the window curtain
additional thorax protection. It also offers addi- air bag is deployed on the side on which the
tional pelvis protection for occupants in the impact occurs.
front seats. However, it does not protect the:
If the system determines that they can offer
Rhead additional protection to that provided by the
Rneck seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
Rarms deployed in other accident situations
(Y page 51).
In the event of a side impact, the side impact air
bag is deployed on the side on which the impact
occurs.
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger Occupant Classification System
side deploys under the following conditions: (OCS)
Rthe OCS system detects that the front- Introduction
passenger seat is occupied or
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
belt buckle of the front-passenger seat egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, Depending on that result, the front-passenger
the side impact air bag on the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
side deploys if an appropriate accident situation either enabled or deactivated.
occurs. In this case, deployment is independent The system does not deactivate:
of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Rthe side impact air bag
or not. Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
Occupant safety 47
Requirements The indicator lamps inform you whether the

front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
To be classified correctly, the front passenger enabled.
must sit:
X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
Rin an almost upright position with their back ignition lock.
against the seat backrest The system carries out self-diagnostics.
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
If the front passenger does not observe these AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simul-
Safety
conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica- taneously for approximately six seconds.
tion, e.g. because the front passenger: The indicator lamps display the status of the
Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- front-passenger front air bag.
selves on a vehicle armrest RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
from the seat cushion off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be in the event of an accident.
sure to observe the correct positioning of the RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
child restraint system. Never place objects passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
cushion. The entire base of the child restraint dent.
system must always rest on the seat cushion of If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
flat as possible against the backrest of the front- front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
passenger seat. indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
The child restraint system must not touch the If the status of the front-passenger front air bag
roof or be subjected to a load by the head changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest display message appears in the instrument clus-
and the head restraint position accordingly. ter (Y page 197). When the front-passenger
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function seat is occupied, always pay attention to the
correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be
tem manufacturer's installation and operating aware of the status of the front-passenger front
instructions. air bag both before and during the journey.
G WARNING
Operation of Occupant Classification
System (OCS) If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function. A person in the front-
passenger seat could then, for example, come
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-
cially if the person is sitting too close to the
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp Rthe classification of the person in the front-
; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp passenger seat is correct and the front-
Z
48 Occupant safety
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- belt guide on the child restraint system. The
bled in accordance with the person in the shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards
front-passenger seat and downwards from the vehicle belt sash
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt
back as far back as possible. sash guide and the front-passenger seat
Rthe person is seated correctly. accordingly. Always observe the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
Make sure, both before and during the jour-
instructions.
ney, that the status of the front-passenger
Safety
front air bag is correct. If OCS determines that:

Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
G WARNING PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child lights up after the system self-test and
restraint system on the front-passenger seat remains lit. This indicates that the front-
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator passenger front air bag is deactivated.
lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
may deploy in the event of an accident. The child of up to twelve months old, in a standard
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR
child could be struck by the air bag. This poses BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. system self-test and remains lit. This indi-
Make sure that the front-passenger front air cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR deactivated.
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
child, in a standard child restraint system, the
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can
stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child go out after the system self-test. This indi-
restraint system on the front-passenger seat. cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
You can find more information on OCS under activated. The result of the classification is
"Problems with the Occupant Classification Sys- dependent on, among other factors, the child
tem" (Y page 50). restraint system and the child's stature. It is
recommended that you install the child
G WARNING restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per-
restraint system on the front-passenger seat son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
and you position the front-passenger seat too small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after
close to the dashboard, in the event of an the system self-test depending on the result
accident, the child could: of the classification or, alternatively, goes out.
Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte- - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat
cator lamp is lit, for example as far back as possible. Alternatively, a per-
son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat.
Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature
This poses an increased risk of injury or even should not use the front-passenger seat.
fatal injury. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
Always move the front-passenger seat as far adult or a person of adult stature, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
back as possible and fully retract the seat goes out after the system self-test. This indi-
cushion length. Always make sure that the cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from activated.
the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder
Occupant safety 49
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to G WARNING

observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 53). If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
When the occupant classification system (OCS) lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light this case, the front-passenger front air bag
up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air cannot perform its intended protective func-
bag is deactivated in this case and does not tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-
Safety
deploy during an accident. Have the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) checked and passenger seat.
repaired immediately at a qualified specialist That person could, for example, come into
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
for this purpose. board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the even fatal injury.
seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary
repair work carried out at a qualified specialist When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that always ensure that:
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Rthe classification of the person in the front-
for this purpose.
passenger seat is correct and the front-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use seat accessories that passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. bled in accordance with the person in the
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not front-passenger seat
mean that the front-passenger front air bag will Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-
also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys- rectly fastened seatbelt
tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
passenger seat. Depending on that result, the
front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or as far back as possible
deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
System self-test passenger seat may not be used. Do not
install a child restraint system on the front-
G DANGER passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do immediately at a qualified specialist work-
not light up during the system self-test, the shop.
system is malfunctioning. The front-
passenger front air bag might be triggered G WARNING
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all Objects between the seat surface and the
in the event of an accident with high deceler- child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or ation. This could result in the front-passenger
even fatal injury. air bag not functioning as intended during an
In this case the front-passenger seat may not accident. This poses an increased risk of
be used. Do not install a child restraint system injury or even fatal injury.
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu- Do not place any objects between the seat
pant Classification System (OCS) checked surface and the child restraint system. The
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- entire base of the child restraint system must
cialist workshop. always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
Z
50 Occupant safety
facing child restraint system must, as far as BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds
possible, be resting on the backrest of the and then goes out.
front-passenger seat. Always comply with the If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
child restraint system manufacturer's instal- lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
lation instructions. front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR
For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-
BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lems with the Occupant Classification System"
lamp displays the status of the front-passenger
Safety
(Y page 50).
front air bag (Y page 47). If the front-passenger
front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 49).
Occupant safety 51
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
BAG OFF indicator lamp rect.
lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person
even though the front- on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 47).
passenger seat is occu-
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-
pied by an adult or a per-
passenger seat may not be used.
son of a stature corre-
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Safety
sponding to that of an
adult. Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.

BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child
does not light up and/or seat.
does not stay on.
X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
Runoccupied against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
Roccupied with the adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
weight of a child up to X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.
twelve months old in a X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
child restraint system belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-
ingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-
mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear
seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning G WARNING

Devices and air bags A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
Important safety notes
tection in an accident. There is an increased
G WARNING risk of injury.
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-
been deployed. There is a risk of injury. ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a bag replaced.
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
It is important for your safety and that of your
cialist workshop as soon as possible. passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
Z
52 Occupant safety
and to have any malfunctioning air bags An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags triggered, if:
continue to perform their protective function for Rthe ignition is switched on
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.
Rthe components of the restraint system are
G WARNING operational. You can find further information
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have under: "Restraint system warning lamp"
(Y page 40)
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in
tional and are unable to perform their inten- the belt buckle of the respective front seat
Safety
ded protective function. This poses an

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. compartment are triggered independently of the
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency lock status of the seat belts.
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a If the restraint system control unit detects a
qualified specialist workshop. more severe accident, further components of
the restraint system are activated independ-
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered ently of each other in certain frontal collision
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, situations:
and a small amount of powder may also be RFront air bags as well as driver's and front-
released. The 6 restraint system warning passenger knee bags
lamp lights up. RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear- mines that deployment can offer additional
ing. The powder that is released generally does protection to that provided by the seat belt
not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause The front-passenger front air bag is activated or
short-term breathing difficulties in people with deactivated depending on the person on the
asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front
it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle air bag can only deploy in an accident if the
immediately or open the window in order to pre- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
vent breathing difficulties. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning BAG indicator lamps (Y page 40).
Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During
which may require special handling and regard the first deployment stage, the front air bag is
for the environment. National guidelines must filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of
be observed during disposal. In California, see injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ the maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec-
Perchlorate/index.cfm. ond deployment threshold is reached within a
few milliseconds.
Method of operation The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices and the air bag are determined
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or
system control unit evaluates important physi- acceleration which occurs at various points in
cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel- the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in
eration, such as: nature. Deployment should take place in good
Rduration time at the start of the collision.
Rdirection The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
Rintensity and the direction of the force are essentially
Based on the evaluation of this data, the determined by:
restraint system control unit triggers the Emer- Rthe distribution of forces during the collision
gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or Rthe collision angle
rear collision. Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided
Children in the vehicle 53
Factors which can only be seen and measured How the air bag system works is determined
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci- by the severity of the accident detected,
sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-
they provide an indication of air bag deploy- eration and the apparent type of accident:
ment. RFrontal collision
The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with- RSide impact
out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if
RRollover
only parts which are relatively easily deformed
are affected and the rate of deceleration is not
Safety
high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even
though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma- Automatic measures after an acci-
tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid dent
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-
bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs Immediately after an accident, the following
as a result. measures are implemented, depending on the
If the restraint system control unit detects a side type and severity of the impact:
impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
components of the restraint system are activa- Rthe emergency lighting is activated
ted independently of each other depending on Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
the apparent type of accident.
Rthe front side windows are lowered
RSide impact air bags on the side where the
Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply
impact takes place, independently of the
Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of is cut off
the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
seats in the second row call
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side deploys under the following
conditions: Children in the vehicle
- the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied or Important safety notes
- the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in Accident statistics show that children secured
the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat in the rear seats are safer than children secured
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
independently of the use of the seat belt and Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
independently of whether the front- a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children
passenger seat is occupied are generally better protected there.
REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system If a child younger than twelve years old and
determines that deployment can offer addi- under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
tional protection in this situation vehicle:
RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
front-passenger side in certain situations system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system The child restraint system must be appropri-
determines that deployment can offer addi- ate to the age, weight and size of the child
tional protection to that provided by the seat Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
belt notes in this section in addition to the child
i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. restraint system manufacturer's installation
The different air bag systems work independ- instructions
ently of each other. Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system
(OCS)" (Y page 46)
Z
54 Children in the vehicle
G WARNING three-point seat belt can be properly fastened

without a booster seat.
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease the parking brake. Special seat belt retractor
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
G WARNING
parking position P.
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
Rstart the engine.
child restraint system will no longer be
Safety
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
an accident and injury. portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
When leaving the vehicle, always take the be immediately refastened. There is an
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
G WARNING the special seat belt retractor and secure the
If persons, particularly children are subjected child restraint system properly.
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
When activated, the special seat belt retractor
vehicle. ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once
the child restraint system has been secured.
G WARNING Installing a child restraint system:
If the child restraint system is subjected to X Always comply with the child restraint system
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- manufacturer's installation instructions.
dren may burn themselves on these parts, X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-
particularly on the metal parts of the child let.
restraint system. There is a risk of injury. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with Activating the special seat belt retractor:
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child While the seat belt is retracting, you should
restraint system has been exposed to direct hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the retractor is activated.
child in it. Never leave children unattended in X Push the child seat restraint system down so
the vehicle. that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.
Removing a child restraint system and deacti-
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
vating the special seat belt retractor:
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly. Particular attention must be paid to X Always comply with the child restraint system
children. manufacturer's installation instructions.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt X Press the release button of the belt buckle,
(Y page 41) and the notes on correct use of seat hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back
belts (Y page 42). towards the belt outlet.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
proper seat belt positioning for children over
41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a
Child restraint system G WARNING

The use of seat belts and child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
is required by law in: tems which have been damaged or subjected
Rall 50 states to a load in an accident can no longer protect
Rthe U.S. territories as intended. The child cannot then be
Rthe District of Columbia
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
Rall Canadian provinces
braking or sudden changes of direction. There
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
Safety
If you install a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the center rear seat, the rear arm rest fatal.
must be folded back as far as possible. Replace child restraint systems which have
You can obtain further information about the been damaged or subjected to a load in an
correct child restraint system from any author- accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. ing systems on the child restraint system
G WARNING checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
before you install a child restraint system
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
again.
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
intended. The child cannot then be restrained The securing systems of child restraint systems
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or are:
sudden changes of direction. There is an Rthe seat belt system
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
Make sure that you observe the child restraint Rthe Top Tether anchorages
system manufacturer's installation instruc- If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
that the base of the child restraint system is information on the "Occupant Classification
always resting completely on the seat cush- System (OCS)" (Y page 46). There you will also
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under find information on deactivating the front-
or behind the child restraint system. Only use passenger front air bag.
child restraint systems with the original cover All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
lowing standards:
designed for them. Only replace damaged
covers with genuine covers. RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
G WARNING
213 and 210.2
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-
rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in responds to the standards can be found on an
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a instruction label on the child restraint system.
sudden change in direction. The child This confirmation can also be found in the instal-
restraint system could be thrown about, strik- lation instructions that are included with the
ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased child restraint system.
risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
rior and on the child restraint system.
Always install child restraint systems prop-
erly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
You will find further information on stowing

objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-
lines" (Y page 233).
Z
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur- systems are installed on the left and right of the
ing system rear seats.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
G WARNING be used and can be installed using the vehicle's
seat belt system. Install the child seat according
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
to the manufacturer's instructions.
do not offer sufficient protective effect for
children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
(22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt Top Tether
Safety
integrated in the child restraint system. In the

event of an accident, a child might not be Introduction
restrained correctly. This poses an increased
Top Tether provides an additional connection
risk of injury or even fatal injury. between the child restraint system secured with
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.
only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.
systems with which the child is also secured If the child restraint system is equipped with a
with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the Top Tether belt, this should always be used.
child restraint system with the Top Tether
belt, if available.
G WARNING
Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-
lation and operating instructions for the child If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
restraint system used. could fold forwards in the event of an acci-
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH- dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged direction. As a result, child restraint systems
correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing cannot perform their intended protective
rings function. Rear seat backrests that are not
! When installing the child restraint system, locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
make sure that the seat belt for the middle in the event of an accident. This poses an
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
otherwise be damaged.
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-
ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-
fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-
ests so that they are in an upright position.
If the rear backrest is not engaged and locked,

the red lock verification indicator will be visible
(Y page 236).
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings :.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
specially designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
Top Tether anchorages the child restraint system manufacturer's

installation instructions when doing so.
X Hook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt
A into Top Tether anchorage =.
Make sure that:
RTop Tether hook ? is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage = as shown.
RTop Tether belt A is not twisted.
Safety
RTop Tether belt A is routed between the
rear seat backrest and the cargo compart-
ment cover if the cargo compartment cover
is installed.
X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:
X If necessary, move head restraint : back
down again slightly . Make sure that you do
not interfere with the correct routing of Top
Tether belt A.
Child restraint system on the front-

The Top Tether anchorage points are installed in
passenger seat
the rear compartment behind the head General notes
restraints on the parcel shelf.
X Press down the rear of cover ; in the direc- Accident statistics show that children secured
tion of the arrow. in the rear seats are safer than children secured
Cover ; is raised slightly at the front. in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
X Fold cover ; upwards.
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
the child restraint system on a rear seat.
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
X Move head restraint : upwards. restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
X Route Top Tether belt A under head always observe the instructions and safety
restraint : between the two head restraint notes on the "Occupant Classification System
bars. (OCS)" (Y page 46).
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as
Vehicles without adjustable head restraints: a result of:
X Top Tether belt with one belt strap: route Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-
Top Tether belt A centrally over head passenger seat
restraint :. Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-
or passenger front air bag
X Top Tether belt with two belt straps: route Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
one Top Tether belt A to the left and one to restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-
the right past the side of head restraint :. board
All vehicles:
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system with Top Tether. Always comply with
Z
Rearward-facing child restraint system Child-proof locks

If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward- Important safety notes
facing child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat, always make sure that the G WARNING
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
lamp is permanently lit (Y page 40) is the front- could:
passenger front air bag deactivated. Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
Always observe the child restraint system man-
Safety
or road users
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-
tions. Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
traffic
Forward-facing child restraint system Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped
If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-
facing child restraint system on the front- There is a risk of an accident and injury.
passenger seat, always move the front- Always activate the child-proof locks and
passenger seat as far back as possible. Fully override feature if children are traveling in the
retract the seat cushion length. The entire base
of the child restraint system must always rest on vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
The backrest of the child restraint system must leave children unattended in the vehicle.
lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. The child restraint system Override feature for:
must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load Rthe rear doors (Y page 59)
by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the Rthe rear side windows (Y page 59)
seat backrest and the head restraint position
accordingly. Always make sure that the shoul- G WARNING
der belt strap is correctly routed from the vehi-
cle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
must be routed forwards and downwards from Rrelease the parking brake.
the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the
vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat
accordingly. parking position P.
Always observe the child restraint system man- Rstart the engine.
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
tions.
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Pets in the vehicle 59
G WARNING Override feature for the rear side win-

If the child restraint system is subjected to dows
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
Safety
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle. X To activate/deactivate: press button :.
If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear
side windows is disabled. Operation is only
Child-proof locks for the rear doors possible using the switches in the driver's
door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is
possible using the switches in the rear com-
partment.
Pets in the vehicle
G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
You secure each door individually with the child- As a result, they could:
proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, trapped, for example
the door can be opened from the outside. Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever endangering other road users
up in the direction of arrow :. Unsecured animals could also be flung around
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are work- the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
ing properly. den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
cle. Always secure animals properly during
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-
port box.
Z
60 Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
Overview of driving safety systems on. It goes out when the engine is running.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
In this section, you will find information about (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.
the following driving safety systems: ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) only brake gently.
(Y page 60)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 60) Important safety notes
Safety
RActive Brake Assist (Y page 61)

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
tion (Y page 60).
(Y page 63)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) G WARNING
(Y page 66) If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 66) braking. The steerability and braking charac-
RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 66) teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
Important safety notes ding and accidents.
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei- diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override
the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
merely aids designed to assist driving. You are including driving safety systems, will also
responsible for maintaining the distance to the become inoperative. Observe the information
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 218) and dis-
good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt play messages which may be shown in the
your driving style to suit the prevailing road and instrument cluster (Y page 189).
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. Braking
The driving safety systems described only work
as effectively as possible when there is ade- X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
quate contact between the tires and the road brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
surface. Please pay special attention to the uation is over.
notes on tires, recommended minimum tire X To make a full brake application: depress
tread depths, etc. (Y page 282). the brake pedal with full force.
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. pulsing in the brake pedal.
Only in this way will the driving safety systems
described in this section work as effectively as The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
possible. of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a
reminder to take extra care while driving.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
allows you to continue steering the vehicle when If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS
braking. automatically boosts the braking force, thus
shortening the stopping distance.
Driving safety systems 61
Important safety notes Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
tion (Y page 60). motorbike
G WARNING Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance Rnew vehicles or after servicing is carried out
in an emergency braking situation is on the Active Brake Assist system

increased. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the important safety notes in the
"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 120).
Safety
In an emergency braking situation, depress Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents have the configuration and operation of the
the wheels from locking. radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. This also applies to collisions at low
speeds where no visible damage to the front of
Braking the vehicle is apparent.
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
the emergency braking situation is over. Activating/deactivating
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Active Brake Assist is active after every ignition
The brakes will function as usual once you cycle.
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
You can activate or deactivate Active Brake
Assist (Y page 182) in the on-board computer.
When deactivated, the distance warning func-
Active Brake Assist tion and the autonomous braking function are
also deactivated.
General information
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- symbol appears in the assistance graphic dis-
tion (Y page 60). play.
Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warn-
ing function with an autonomous braking func- Distance warning function
tion and braking assistance appropriate to the
situation. General information
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the The distance warning function can help you to
risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a
front or reduce the effects of such a collision. vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a
If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk collision. If the distance warning function
of collision, you will be warned visually and detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and be warned visually and acoustically.
audible collision warning, autonomous braking Important safety notes
can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply
the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adap- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tive Brake Assist supports you with braking tion for driving safety systems (Y page 60).
assistance appropriate to the situation.
G WARNING
Important safety notes The distance warning function does not react:
Rto people or animals
Detection of hazardous situations can be par-
ticularly impaired by: Rto oncoming vehicles
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else Rto crossing traffic
covering the sensors Rwhen cornering
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Z
Thus, the distance warning function cannot The autonomous braking function:
provide a warning in all critical situations. Rgives the driver more time to react to critical
There is a risk of an accident. driving situations
Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake. Rreduces the effects of an accident
Vehicles without Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
G WARNING the autonomous braking function is available in
the following speed ranges:
The distance warning function cannot always
Safety
R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects

clearly identify objects and complex traffic
R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
situations.
objects
In such cases, the distance warning function Vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: the
may: autonomous braking function is available in the
Rgive an unnecessary warning following speed ranges:
Rnot give a warning R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving
objects
There is a risk of an accident.
R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- objects
uation and do not rely solely on the distance Due to the nature of the system, particularly
warning function. complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-
Function tion to intervene.
Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph
(7 km/h), the distance warning function warns Braking assistance appropriate to the
you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An situation
intermittent warning tone will then sound, and
the · distance warning lamp will light up in General information
the instrument cluster.
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
tion (Y page 60).
distance from the vehicle in front.
or With the help of the radar sensor system, Adap-
tive Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in
X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
the path of your vehicle for an extended period
so. of time.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly If Adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-
complicated but non-critical driving conditions sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the
may also cause the system to display a warning. brake pressure necessary to avoid a collision. If
With the help of the radar sensor system, the you apply the brakes forcefully, the braking
distance warning function can detect obstacles assistance adapts to the situation and automat-
that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten- ically increases the brake pressure to a degree
ded period of time. appropriate to the traffic situation.
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph Braking assistance appropriate to the situation
(70 km/h), the distance warning function can provides braking assistance in hazardous situa-
also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop- tions at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses
ped or parked vehicles. radar sensor technology to assess the traffic
situation.
Autonomous braking function Situation-dependent braking assistance is capa-
ble of reacting to moving objects that have
If the driver does not react to the distance warn- already been recognized as such at least once
ing signal in a critical situation, Active Brake over the period of observation, up to vehicle
Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous speeds of around 155 mph (250 km/h).
braking function.
Braking assistance appropriate to the situation brake system is still available with full brake
can also detect stationary objects, up to vehicle boosting effect and BAS.
speeds of around 44 mph 70 km/h.
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if: General notes
Ryou release the brake pedal. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Safety
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. tion (Y page 60).
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi- ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.
cle. power transmission between the tires and the
Braking assistance appropriate to the situation road surface.
is then deactivated. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from
the direction desired by the driver, one or more
Important safety notes wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- engine output is also modified to keep the vehi-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 60). cle on the desired course within physical limits.
ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on
G WARNING wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: the vehicle during braking.
Rto people or animals
Rto oncoming vehicles
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Rto crossing traffic i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Rwhen cornering
tion (Y page 60).
As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.
risk of an accident. Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
uation and be ready to brake. example if the road surface is slippery on one
side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-
G WARNING red to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly Traction control remains active, even if you
identify objects and complex traffic situa- deactivate ESP®.
tions.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist might:
Rintervene unnecessarily i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
Rnot intervene
There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-
intervention in a non-critical driving situation. ing safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Due to the nature of the system, complex but Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
non-critical driving conditions may also cause
qualified specialist workshop.
Active Brake Assist to intervene.
Even if Active Brake Assist is not available due to
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
Z
Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your You can select between the following states of
vehicle with the front axle raised, it is important ESP®:
that you observe the notes on ESP® RESP® is activated.
(Y page 277).
RESP® is deactivated.
If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up
continuously, ESP® is deactivated. G WARNING
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
available due to a malfunction.
Safety
of skidding and an accident.

Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 219) and display messages which may Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
be shown in the instrument cluster bed in the following.
(Y page 189).
Only use wheels with the recommended tire The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. action for better traction on loose surfaces.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-
ing situations:
Characteristics of ESP®
Rwhen using snow chains
General information Rin deep snow
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes out before Ron sand or gravel
beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
active. described above no longer apply. ESP® will
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
flashes in the instrument cluster. the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
If ESP® intervenes: spin.
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum- ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
stances. extended period with ESP® deactivated. You
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
necessary when pulling away.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions. You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-
board computer (Y page 182).
ECO start/stop function ESP®deactivated:
The ECO start/stop function switches the The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-
engine off automatically when the vehicle stops ment cluster lights up.
moving. The engine starts automatically when ESP®activated:
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®
remains in its previously selected status. Exam- The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-
ple: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine ment cluster goes out.
was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
when the engine is switched on again.
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the
Deactivating/activating ESP® (except instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
Important safety notes If you deactivate ESP®:
RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
tion (Y page 60). REngine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
RTraction control is still activated. the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
RSTEER CONTROL is no longer active spin.
RESP® still provides support when you brake ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
firmly. extended period with ESP® deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) Deactivating/activating ESP®
Safety
tion (Y page 60).
You can select between the following states of
ESP®:
RESP® is activated.
RSPORT handling mode is activated.
RESP® is deactivated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
X To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly
press button :.
there is a greater risk of skidding and acci- The M SPORT handling mode warning
dents. lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit- SPORT handling mode message appears in
uations described in the following. the multifunction display.
X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
G WARNING briefly press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until
of skidding and an accident.
the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- the instrument cluster.
bed in the following. The ÷ OFF message appears in the multi-
function display.
In the following situations, it may be better to X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :.
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
ESP®: instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP®
Rwhen using snow chains ON message appears in the multifunction dis-
Rin deep snow play.
Ron sand or gravel
Characteristics of activated SPORT han-
Ron specially designated roads when the vehi-
dling mode
cle's own oversteering and understeering
characteristics are desired If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warn-
ESP® requires an extremely qualified and expe- ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP®
rienced driver. only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.
When SPORT handling mode is activated:
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
RESP® only improves driving stability to a limi-
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if ted degree.
RTraction control is still activated.
Z
RThe engine's torque is only restricted to a the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing

limited degree and the drive wheels may start the brake firmly.
to spin. ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speeds
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting of about 65 km/h.
action for better traction on loose surfaces. ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP®
RESP® still provides support when you brake is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunc-
firmly. tion.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
Safety
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the tion)
instrument cluster does not flash. In such situa-
tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. General information
If you deactivate ESP®: EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
RESP® no longer improves driving stability. on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
REngine torque is no longer limited and the while braking.
drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting Important safety notes
action for better traction on loose surfaces.
RTraction control is still activated.
tion (Y page 60).
RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor
is it activated if you brake firmly with assis- G WARNING
tance from ESP® If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
RESP® still provides support when you brake lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
firmly. risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
ESP® trailer stabilization to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
General information
cialist workshop.
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to
swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP® Observe information regarding indicator and
slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting warning lamps (Y page 218) as well as display
the engine output until the vehicle/trailer com- messages (Y page 191).
bination has stabilized.
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
G WARNING
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
If road and weather conditions are poor, offers increased braking comfort. In addition to
trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has
the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv- the HOLD function (Y page 156) and hill start
ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can assist (Y page 124).
tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is
a risk of an accident.
STEER CONTROL
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-
ing road and weather conditions. General information
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com- STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize noticeable steering force to the steering wheel
in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
Protection against theft 67
This steering assistance is provided in particular ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

if:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake
Rthe vehicle begins to skid

Safety
tion (Y page 60).
No steering assistance is provided from STEER
CONTROL, if:
RESP® is malfunctioning
Rthe steering is malfunctioning X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO.
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
further by the electrical power steering. is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-
Key or KEYLESS-GO.
Protection against theft or
Immobilizer X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
being started without the correct SmartKey. alarm system is armed and you open:
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the Ra door
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func- Rthe trunk lid
tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off Rthe hood
and open the driver's door. X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey:
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. press the % or & button on the Smart-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Key.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone The alarm is stopped.
can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been or
left inside the vehicle. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
i The immobilizer is always deactivated when ton from the ignition lock (Y page 121).
you start the engine.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
In the event that the engine cannot be started The alarm is stopped.
(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-
tem is not operational. Contact an authorized X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
Mercedes-Benz Center or call grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or must be outside the vehicle.
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). The alarm is stopped.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-
cle.
The alarm is stopped.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close
the open door that triggered it, for example.
Z
68 Protection against theft
i If the alarm continues for more than

30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-
tem automatically notifies the Customer
Assistance Center. This is done either by text
message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends the mes-
sage or data provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
Safety
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.
SmartKey 69
SmartKey the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g. when

starting the engine using the Start/Stop button.
G WARNING SmartKey functions
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Opening and closing

Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P : & To lock the vehicle
; F To open the trunk lid
RStart the engine.
= % To unlock the vehicle
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Rthe vehicle is locked again.
leave children or animals unattended in the
Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
X To lock: press the & button.
reach of children.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
G WARNING Rthe doors
If you attach heavy or large objects to the Rthe trunk lid
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten- Rthe fuel filler flap
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a three times when locking.
risk of an accident. When the locator lighting is activated via the
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote
control (see the separate operating instruc-
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. tions).
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag- that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control signal can be activated and deactivated using
function could be affected. the on-board computer (Y page 185).
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-
X To open the trunk lid automatically: press
ity of powerful electrical installations.
and hold the F button until the trunk lid
Do not keep the SmartKey: opens (Y page 78).
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do
not keep the SmartKey in the trunk. Otherwise,
Z
70 SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO Make sure that you do not touch the inner

surface of the door handle.
General notes X Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an extended
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by period.
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-
Key in the vehicle. Further information on the convenience clos-
ing feature (Y page 82).
Locking and unlocking
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the
SmartKey with you. You can combine the func-
Opening and closing
tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-

tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using
KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the
& button on the SmartKey.
The driver's door and the door at which the han-
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle. When locking or
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance
between the SmartKey and the corresponding X To unlock the trunk lid: pull trunk lid han-
door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). dle :.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the Smart- Deactivating and activating
Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. This occurs, for example: If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a lon-
ger period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESS-
Rwhen starting the engine GO. The SmartKey will then use very little power,
Rwhile driving thereby conserving battery power. For the pur-
Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS poses of activation/deactivation, the vehicle
Rwhen the external door handles are touched
must not be nearby.
Rduring convenience closing X To deactivate: press the & button on the
SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then
KEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 72).
X To activate: press any button on the Smart-
Key.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features
are available again.
X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur- KEYLESS-GO start function
face of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :
General notes
or ;. Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-
Key in the vehicle.
SmartKey 71
Changing the settings of the locking There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
system X To deactivate the alarm with the key: press
the % or & button on the key.
You can change the settings of the locking sys-
tem. This means that only the driver's door and or
the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel or
on your own. X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-GO:
X To change the setting: press and hold the press the Start/Stop button in the ignition
% and & buttons simultaneously for lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
approximately six seconds until the battery or
indicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 72). X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-
Opening and closing

If the setting of the locking system is changed GO. The SmartKey must be outside the vehi-
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing cle.
the & or % button: If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
Rlocks or key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-
Runlocks the vehicle matically.
The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X To unlock: press the % button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the % button
twice. Removing the mechanical key
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-

lows:
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner
surface of the door handle on the driver's
door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface
of the door handle on the front-passenger
door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X To restore the factory settings: press and X Push release catch : in the direction of the
hold the % and & buttons simultane- arrow and at the same time remove mechan-
ously for approximately six seconds until the ical key ; from the SmartKey.
battery check lamp flashes twice For further information about:
(Y page 72). RUnlocking the driver's door (Y page 76)
RUnlocking the trunk (Y page 80)
RLocking the vehicle (Y page 76)
Mechanical key
General notes Inserting the mechanical key
X Push mechanical key ; completely into the
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
SmartKey until it engages and release
unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
catch : is back in its basic position.
use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-
theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 67).
Z
72 SmartKey
SmartKey battery Replacing the battery

Important safety notes You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
G WARNING (Y page 71).
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
Opening and closing
immediately.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate

material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-
ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ X Press mechanical key ; into the opening in
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow
until battery tray cover : opens. When doing
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the so, do not hold cover : shut.
battery replaced at a qualified specialist work- X Remove battery tray cover :.
shop.
Checking the battery
X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your

palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
X Press the & or % button. minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
The battery is working properly if battery do so.
check lamp : lights up briefly.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
The battery is discharged if battery check free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover :
X Change the battery (Y page 72).
and then press to close it.
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
the signal reception range of the vehicle, (Y page 71).
pressing the & or % button: X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on
Rlocks or the vehicle.
Runlocks the vehicle
i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-

cialist workshop.
SmartKey 73
Problems with the SmartKey

You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function:
the SmartKey. try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control func-
tion of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle from close range and press the % or & button.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if necessary
Opening and closing

(Y page 72).
X Unlock (Y page 76) or lock (Y page 76) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function:
try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control func-
tion of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle from close range and press the % or & button.
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if necessary
KEYLESS-GO. (Y page 72).
mechanical key.
mechanical key.
Z
74 SmartKey

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-
trol function:
mechanical key.
Opening and closing
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.
The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
Key. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 273).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 273).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked.

started using the Start/ X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
Stop button. The Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 72).
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
Key. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors 75
Doors
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
Opening and closing

X To unlock and open a front door: pull door
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in handle ;.
motion if, for example, they: If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.
Rrelease
The door is unlocked and opens.
the parking brake.
X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of knob :.
park position P The door is unlocked and can be opened.
RStart the engine. X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. You can open a door from inside the vehicle
When leaving the vehicle, always take the even if it has been locked. You can only open the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not
secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 59).
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door
reach of children. from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 67).
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the cargo compartment. Observe the loading
guidelines (Y page 233).
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
Unlocking and opening doors from You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from
the inside the inside. This can be useful if you wish to lock
the vehicle before pulling away, for example.
! The side windows will not open/close if the
battery is discharged or if the side windows
have iced up. It will then not be possible to
close the door. Do not attempt to force the
door closed. You could otherwise damage the
door or the side window.
When a door is opened, the side window on that
side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the
side window closes again.
X To unlock: press button :.

X To lock: press button ;.
If all the doors and the trunk lid are closed, the
vehicle locks.
Z
76 Doors
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked You could therefore lock yourself out if:
or unlocked. Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the Rthe vehicle is being towed.
inside if the vehicle has been locked with the
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle You can also switch the automatic locking func-
even if it has been locked. You can open the rear tion on and off using the on-board computer
doors from inside the vehicle unless they are (Y page 184).
secured by the child-proof lock (Y page 59).
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-
from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm ical key)
Opening and closing
system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 67).

If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be use the mechanical key.
taken into consideration if:
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but- open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
ton for the central locking, or tem will be triggered (Y page 67).
Rif the vehicle was locked automatically X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ- (Y page 71).
ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the
door had been previously unlocked, only the driver's door as far as it will go.
door which has been opened from the inside is
unlocked.
Automatic locking feature
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise

as far as it will go to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
X To deactivate: press and hold button : for (Y page 71).
approximately five seconds until a tone
sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
approximately five seconds until a tone Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
sounds. If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
If you press one of the two buttons and do not SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already key.
been selected. X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn- doors and the trunk lid.
ing.
Trunk 77
X Press the locking button on the driver’s door G WARNING

(Y page 75).
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
X Check whether the locking knobs on the
front-passenger door and the rear doors are not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
still visible. Press down the locking knobs by over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
hand, if necessary. occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
X Close the driver's door. larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey den change in direction.
(Y page 71). Always store objects so that they cannot be
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
driver's door as far as it will go. loads against slipping or tipping before the
Opening and closing

journey.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.

Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
clearance above the trunk lid.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 314).
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 233).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it could otherwise lock yourself out.
will go to position 1. The trunk lid can be:
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
Ropened and closed manually from outside
X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid are
Ropened automatically from outside
locked.
Ropened automatically from inside
X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 71). Rreleased with the emergency release from the
inside
i If you lock the vehicle as described above,
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft
alarm system is not armed. Opening/closing from outside
Opening
Trunk
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid X Press the % button on the SmartKey.
open. X Pull handle :.
X Raise the trunk lid.
Z
78 Trunk
Closing HANDS-FREE ACCESS

G WARNING
The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot.
You could burn yourself by touching the
exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE
ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always
ensure that you only make the kicking move-
ment within the detection range of sensors.
Opening and closing
! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection

X Pull down the trunk lid using handle :. range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-
X Let the trunk lid drop into the lock. tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & tional opening of the trunk:
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO. Rusing a car wash
Rusing a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft
Opening automatically from outside (3 m) away from the vehicle.
Important safety notes i You can also deactivate KEYLESS-GO. Fur-

ther information on deactivating and activat-
G WARNING ing KEYLESS-GO (Y page 70).
General notes
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS,
trunk lid is open when the engine is running, you can open the trunk lid without using your
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a hands. This is useful if you have your hands full.
To do this, make a kicking movement under the
risk of poisoning.
bumper with your foot.
Always switch off the engine before opening Observe the following points:
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-
open. son. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear
detection range of the vehicle.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. RWhen making the kicking movement, make
clearance above the trunk lid. sure that you are standing firmly on the
ground and that there is sufficient clearance
i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise
be found under "Vehicle data" (Y page 314). lose your balance, for example on ice.
Opening automatically
You can open the trunk lid automatically using
the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid.
X Press and hold the F button on the Smart-
Key until the trunk lid opens.
or
X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid
handle and let it go again immediately.
Trunk 79
Operation
Opening and closing

RAlways ensure that you only make the kicking
movement within the detection range of sen-
sors :. X To open: kick into sensor detection range :
RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the below the bumper with your foot.
rear area while doing so. X If the trunk lid does not open after several
RDo not come into contact with the bumper attempts: wait at least ten seconds then
while making the kicking movement. Other- move your leg under the bumper once again.
wise, the sensors may not function correctly. If you hold your foot under the bumper for too
RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function long, the trunk lid does not open. Repeat the leg
when the engine is started. movement more quickly if this occurs.
RDirt caused by road salt around sensors :
may restrict functionality.
Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros- Opening automatically from inside
thetic leg may restrict functionality.
RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detec- Important safety notes
tion range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREE
ACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lid G WARNING
could thus be opened unintentionally, for Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
example, when you: gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
- set something down or lift something up gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
behind the vehicle. trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
- polish the rear of the vehicle. especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your risk of poisoning.
person in these situations or in situations sim-
ilar to these. This will prevent the uninten- Always switch off the engine before opening
tional opening of the trunk lid. the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.

found under "Vehicle data" (Y page 314).
Opening
You can open the trunk lid from the driver's seat
when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.
Z
80 Side windows
X Fold the rear seat backrest forwards

(Y page 236).
X Insert a suitable tool ;, e.g. a screwdriver,
into opening : in the paneling.
The trunk lid is released.
X Open the trunk lid.
Emergency release button

You can open the trunk lid from inside the vehi-
cle with the emergency release button.
Opening and closing
X To open: pull remote operating switch : for

the trunk lid until the trunk lid opens.
Emergency release for the trunk

General notes
found in the "Vehicle data" section X Press emergency release button : briefly.
(Y page 314). The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
If the trunk lid can no longer be unlocked:
The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with
Rusing the SmartKey, or the trunk lid emergency release when the vehi-
Rusing the remote operating switch in the door cle is stationary or while driving.
control panel: The trunk lid emergency release does not open
Use the emergency release on the inside of the the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or
trunk lid. discharged.
You can reach the emergency release via the Trunk lid emergency release light:
trunk. REmergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.
Opening REmergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.
Side windows
G WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side win-
dow and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
dow during the opening procedure. If some-
Side windows 81
body becomes trapped, release the switch or someone becomes trapped, press the switch
pull the switch to close the side window again. to open the side window again.
G WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in Opening and closing the side win-
the closing area could become trapped. There dows
is a risk of injury. The switches for all side windows are located on
When closing make sure that no parts of the the driver's door. There is also a switch on each
body are in the closing area. If somebody door for the corresponding side window.
becomes trapped, release the switch or press The switches on the driver's door take prece-
Opening and closing

the switch to open the side window again. dence.
G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
: Front left
; Front right
Side window reversing feature = Rear right
The side windows are equipped with an auto- ? Rear left
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
or restricts a side window from traveling ignition lock (Y page 121).
upwards during the automatic closing process, X To open manually: press and hold the cor-
the side window opens again automatically. Dur-
responding switch.
ing the manual closing process, the side window
only opens again automatically after the corre- X To open fully: press the switch beyond the
sponding switch is released. The automatic point of resistance and release it.
reversing feature is only an aid and is no substi- Automatic operation is started.
tute for your attention when closing a side win- X To close manually: pull the corresponding
dow. switch and hold it.
X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
G WARNING
point of resistance and release it.
The reversing feature does not react: Automatic operation is started.
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- X To interrupt automatic operation: press/
gers pull the corresponding switch again.
Rwhile resetting i If you press/pull the switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is
This means that the reversing feature cannot started in the corresponding direction. You
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- can stop automatic operation by pressing/
uations. There is a risk of injury. pulling the switch again.
Make sure that no body parts are in close i You can continue to operate the side win-
proximity during the closing procedure. If dows after you switch off the engine or
remove the SmartKey. This function remains
Z
82 Side windows
active for five minutes or until the driver's or Convenience closing feature
front-passenger door is opened.
i When the override feature for the side win- Important safety notes
dows is activated (Y page 59), the side win-
dows cannot be operated from the rear.
G WARNING
When the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating, parts of the body could become trapped
Convenience opening in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the KEYLESS-
GO start function, Exclusive package or Observe the complete closing procedure
AMG Exclusive package: you can ventilate the when the convenience closing feature is oper-
Opening and closing
vehicle before you start driving. ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
The SmartKey can also be used to carry out the close proximity during the closing procedure.
following functions simultaneously:
Runlock the vehicle
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the KEYLESS-
GO start function, Exclusive Package or
Ropen the side windows
AMG Exclusive Package: at the same time you
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/slid- can:
ing panel and the roller sunblind
Rlock the vehicle
The convenience opening feature can only be
Rclose the side windows
operated using the SmartKey.
Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-
able when the vehicle is unlocked. ing panel
X Vehicles with Exclusive package or AMG
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
Exclusive package but without KEYLESS- tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller
sunblind.
GO and the KEYLESS-GO start function: for
the following operations, point the tip of the i Notes on the automatic reversing feature
SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's for:
door. The SmartKey must be close to the driv- Rthe side window (Y page 81)
er's door handle.
Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY- panel (Y page 85)
LESS-GO start function: the SmartKey must
Rthe roller sunblind (Y page 86)
be in close proximity to the vehicle.
X Press and hold the % button until the side Using the SmartKey
windows and the panorama sunroof are in the
desired position. XVehicles with Exclusive package or AMG
If the roller sunblind of the panorama roof Exclusive package but without KEYLESS-
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed, the GO and the KEYLESS-GO start function: for
roller sunblind is opened first. the following operations, point the tip of the
X Press and hold the % button once more SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's
until the panorama roof with power tilt/slid- door. The SmartKey must be close to the driv-
ing panel reaches the desired position. er's door handle.
X To interrupt convenience opening: release i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY-
the % button. LESS-GO start function: the SmartKey must
be in close proximity to the vehicle.
X Press and hold the & button until the side
windows and the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
are closed.
Side windows 83
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel: tilt/sliding panel:
X Press and hold the & button again until the X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
roller sunblind of the panorama roof with door handle again until the roller sunblind of
power tilt/sliding panel closes. the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel closes.
X To interrupt convenience closing: release
the & button. X To interrupt convenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on the door han-
dle.
Using KEYLESS-GO
The driver's door and the door at which the han-
Opening and closing

dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey Resetting the side windows
must be outside the vehicle. The gap between
the SmartKey and the corresponding door han- If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). you must reset it.
X Close all the doors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 121).
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed (Y page 81).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
the door control panel until the side window is
completely closed (Y page 81).
XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the X Hold the switch for an additional second.
door handle until the side windows and the X If the respective side window remains closed
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel after the button is released, then it has been
are fully closed. set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the
i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor steps above again.
surface :.
X Make sure that all the side windows are
closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
are closed.
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Z
84 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

A side window cannot be X Remove the objects.
closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
closed and you cannot slightly:
see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
Opening and closing
The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding When leaving the vehicle, always take the
panel SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
In the following section, the term "sliding sun- G WARNING
roof" refers to the panorama roof with power At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto-
tilt/sliding panel.
matically lowers slightly at the rear. This could
G WARNING trap you or other persons. There is a risk of
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into
body parts in close proximity could become the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the
trapped. There is a risk of injury. vehicle is in motion.
Make sure that no body parts are in close If somebody becomes trapped, immediately
proximity during the opening and closing pro- pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid-
cedures. ing sunroof lifts during opening.
If somebody becomes trapped:
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of
Rrelease the switch immediately, or snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
Rduring automatic operation, push the
occur.
switch briefly in any direction Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be
The opening or closing procedure will be stop- damaged.
ped.
! The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-
G WARNING ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-
If children operate the sliding sunroof they cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if
could become trapped, particularly if they are water enters the vehicle interior.
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. i Resonance noises can occur in addition to
the usual airflow noises when the sliding sun-
roof is open. They are caused by minor pres-
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 85
sure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Operating the panorama roof with
Change the position of the sliding sunroof or power tilt/sliding panel
open a side window slightly to reduce or elim-
inate these noises. Opening and closing
Sliding sunroof reversing feature

In the following section, the term "sliding sun-
roof" refers to the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel.
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-
Opening and closing

matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing
process, the sliding sunroof opens again auto-
matically. However, the automatic reversing
feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of
the responsibility of paying attention when clos- : To raise
ing the sliding sunroof. ; To open
G WARNING = To close/lower
The reversing feature does not react: The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
can only be operated when the roller sunblind is
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- open.
gers X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing ignition lock (Y page 121).
movement X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
Rduring resetting sponding direction.
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man- If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the
ually immediately after automatic reversing point of resistance, automatic operation is star-
ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
This means that the reversing feature cannot automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- switch again.
uations. There is a risk of injury. After opening the sliding sunroof, the roller sun-
Make sure that no body parts are in close blind closes slightly automatically. This reduces
proximity during the closing procedure. drafts in the vehicle interior.
If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it low-
If somebody becomes trapped:
ers slightly automatically at higher speeds. The
Rrelease the switch immediately, or noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
result.
automatic closing process At low speeds it raises again automatically.
You can also temporarily deactivate automatic
The closing process is stopped. lowering. To do so, press the 3 switch. The
sliding sunroof raises again automatically.
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof
after switching off the engine or removing the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function
remains active for five minutes or until you open
a front door.
The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roof
carrier is installed. In order to allow ventilation
of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding
sunroof.
Z
If contact is made with a roof carrier approved If somebody becomes trapped:

by Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowers
slightly but remains raised at the rear. Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
Rain-closing feature switch briefly in any direction
The rain-closing feature is only available for vehi- The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
cles with a rain sensor. ped.
When the SmartKey is in position 0 in the igni-
tion lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior
closes automatically: from sunlight. The roller sunblind can only be
opened and closed when the panorama roof
Rif it starts to rain. with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
Opening and closing
Rat extreme outside temperatures.

Rafter six hours. Roller sunblind reversing feature
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply.
The roller sunblind is equipped with an auto-
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
remains raised at the rear in order to allow ven- or restricts the roller sunblind during the closing
tilation of the vehicle interior. process, the roller sunblind opens again auto-
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding matically. However, the automatic reversing
panel is obstructed while being closed by the feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of
rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The the responsibility of paying attention when clos-
rain-closing feature is then deactivated. ing the roller sunblind.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
does not close if: G WARNING
Rit is raised at the rear. The reversing feature does not react:
Rit is blocked. Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
Rno rain is falling on the area of the windshield gers
being monitored by the rain sensor. If the Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again man-
vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport, for
ually immediately after automatic reversal
example, the field of the sensor may be cov-
ered. This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
Operating the roller sunblind for the When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding that no body parts are in the sweep area.
panel If somebody becomes trapped:
Important safety notes Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
G WARNING
automatic closing process
Parts of the body could become trapped
The closing process is stopped.
between the roller sunblind and frame or slid-
ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-
ing. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-
blind.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 87
Opening and closing Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel or the roller sunblind, if the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sun-
blind does not move smoothly.
X Pull the 3 button repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow : until
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
second.
Opening and closing

X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of
: To open resistance in the direction of arrow : until
; To open the roller sunblind is fully closed.
= To close X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
second.
X Make sure that the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind can
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre- be fully opened and closed again.
sponding direction.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is star-
ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
switch again.
After opening the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, the roller sunblind automati-
cally closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the
vehicle interior.
Resetting the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel or the roller
sunblind
Z
Problems with the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

G WARNING
If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption, then the
backing up function will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased or
maximum force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
Always reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a
Opening and closing

The panorama roof with If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed during
power tilt/sliding panel closing and reopens again slightly:
cannot be closed and X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
you cannot see the point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
cause. panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed with more
force.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed again
during closing and reopens again slightly:
X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed without
the automatic reversing feature.
Seats 89
Correct driver's seat position Ryou should have a good overview of traffic
conditions
Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body
G WARNING and is routed across the center of your shoul-
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do der and across your hips in the pelvic area
the following while driving: Further related subjects:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, RAdjusting the seats manually (Y page 90)
steering wheel or mirrors RAdjusting the seats electrically
Rfasten the seat belt (Y page 91)
RAdjusting the steering wheel manually
There is a risk of an accident. (Y page 94)
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- RFastening the seat belt correctly
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt (Y page 43)
before starting the engine. RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

mirrors (Y page 95)
RVehicles with a memory function: saving
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings using the memory function
(Y page 97)
Seats
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
Observe the following when adjusting steering
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =: The seats can still be adjusted when there is no
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as SmartKey in the ignition lock.
possible
Ryou
G WARNING
are sitting in a normal upright position
Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
cushion occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
can depress the pedals properly Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
by the center of the head restraint
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
arms slightly bent (Y page 44) and "Children in the vehicle"
Ryou can move your legs freely (Y page 53).
Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument G WARNING
cluster clearly
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in
Z
90 Seats
motion. This could cause you to lose control of ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. footwell under or behind the seats when mov-
ing the seats back. There is a risk that the
Always make sure that the driver's seat is seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
engaged before starting the vehicle.
i Further related subjects:
G WARNING Rcargo compartment enlargement (folding
down the rear seats) (Y page 236)
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, Adjusting the seats manually
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
Vehicles without the seating comfort
package
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a
risk of injury. Seat fore-and-aft adjustment:
While moving the seats, make sure that your X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or
hands or other body parts do not get under the backwards.
lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys- X Release lever : again.
tem. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information: Backrest angle:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as X Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards.
soon as possible. Seat height:
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
X Pull handle ; upwards or push it down
switch on the seat heating. The seat heat-
ing should also not be used to dry the seats. repeatedly until the seat has reached the
desired height.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section.
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.
Do not place sharp objects on the seat
cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The
seats should only be occupied by passen-
gers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating materi-
als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,
child seats or booster seats.
Seats 91
Vehicles with the seating comfort pack- Adjusting the seats electrically
age
: Seat height

; Seat cushion angle
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment:
= Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or
? Backrest angle
rearwards.
X Release lever : again. i You can store the seat settings using the
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in memory function (Y page 97).
position.
Backrest angle:
Adjusting the head restraints
X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
X Turn handwheel A forwards or backwards. Important safety notes
Seat height: G WARNING
X Pull handle ? upwards or push it down You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
repeatedly until the seat has reached the the following while driving:
desired height.
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
Seat cushion angle:
X Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly
supported.
X Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards. There is a risk of an accident.
Seat cushion length: Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
X Lift handle ; and slide the front part of the
before starting the engine.
seat cushion forwards or backwards.
X Release lever ; again.
The seat cushion engages. G WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Z
92 Seats
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the With this function you can adjust the distance
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to between the head restraint and the back of the
your head. seat occupant's head.
X To move forwards: pull the head restraint
General notes forwards in the direction of the arrow until it
engages.
For vehicles with sports seats you cannot adjust There are several notches.
the front head restraints or the outer rear head
X To move backwards: press and hold release
restraints.
button : and push the head restraint back-
wards.
Adjusting the head restraints manually
X When the head restraint is in the desired posi-
Adjusting the head restraint height tion, release the button and make sure that
the head restraint is engaged in position.
Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the

desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down to the desired position.
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
head restraint desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum sup-
port for your back.
Seats 93
Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off
G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high tempera-
tures may be affected or they may even suffer
: Raises the backrest contour burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
; Softens the backrest contour Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
= Lowers the backrest contour repeatedly.

? Hardens the backrest contour
AMG Performance Seat

Vehicles with electrically adjustable seats: to
adjust the contour of the seat and for improved
lateral support, you can individually adjust the
front seats.
The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-

cate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down from
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight
minutes.
The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cush-
ion The system automatically switches off approx-
imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.
X To set the side bolsters of the seat cush-
ion narrower: press button :.
X To set the side bolsters of the seat cush-
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
ion wider: press button ;.
until the desired heating level is set.
Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat back- X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
rest until all the indicator lamps go out.
X To set the side bolsters of the seat back-
rest narrower: press button =. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
X To set the side bolsters of the seat back-
rest wider: press button ?.
Z
94 Steering wheel
Problems with the seat heating

The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
switched off prematurely ers are switched on.
or cannot be switched X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
on. rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch
back on automatically.
Steering wheel
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
There is a risk of an accident. : Release lever
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ; Adjusts the steering wheel height
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt = Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-
before starting the engine. and-aft adjustment)
X Push release lever : down completely.
G WARNING The steering column is unlocked.
Children could injure themselves if they X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of tion.
injury. X Push release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked. When
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft
direction.
Adjusting the steering wheel

G WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering
wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
Mirrors 95
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror

X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side:

press button ;.
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : for-
wards or back. Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but-
ton :.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding but-
ton lights up in red.
Exterior mirrors The indicator lamp goes out again after some
time. You can adjust the selected exterior
Adjusting the exterior mirrors mirror using button = as long as the indicator
lamp is lit.
G WARNING
X Press button = up, down, or to the right or
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror
the following while driving: to the correct position. You should have a
Radjust
good overview of traffic conditions.
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field
of vision.
After the engine has been started, the exterior
There is a risk of an accident. mirrors are automatically heated at low outside
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- temperatures. Heating takes a maximum of ten
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt minutes.
before starting the engine. i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors
manually by switching on the rear window
G WARNING defroster.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the dis-
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Z
96 Mirrors
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
electrically manually, they do not fold out.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into
the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button
(Y page 96) until you hear the mirror click into
place.
The mirror housing is engaged again and you
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
ignition lock (Y page 121). (Y page 95).
X Briefly press :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are Automatic anti-glare mirrors
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate. G WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
i If you are driving faster than 30 mph
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte- matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte
rior mirrors. is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-
Resetting the exterior mirrors piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not observe the following:
fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin
locking" function in the on-board computer
immediately with water.
(Y page 185).
RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock (Y page 121). your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
X Briefly press :. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out induce vomiting.
automatically RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is attention immediately.
activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 185): RImmediately change out of clothing which
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as has come into contact with electrolyte.
soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati- attention immediately.
cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function is
door. only available if the vehicle is equipped with the
"Mirrors package".
Memory function 97
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on Calling up a stored parking position set-
the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare ting
mode if:
Rthe ignition is switched on and
lock (Y page 121).
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
X Adjust the front-passenger side exterior mir-
sor in the rear-view mirror
ror using the corresponding button
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if (Y page 95).
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting
X Engage reverse gear.
is switched on.
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
Parking position for the exterior mir- moves back to its original position:
ror on the front-passenger side
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)

Setting and storing the parking position
Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged
You can set the front-passenger side exterior reverse gear
mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on Rwhen you use button : to select the exterior
that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. mirror on the driver's side
You can store this position.
Memory function
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror side when the vehicle is stationary.
; Button for the front-passenger side exterior
mirror G WARNING
= Button for the exterior mirror setting
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
? Memory button M
you and other vehicle occupants – particularly
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. children – could become trapped. There is a
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition risk of injury.
lock (Y page 121).
While the memory function is making adjust-
X Press button ;.
ments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat. If somebody
side moves to the default parking position. becomes trapped, immediately release the
X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to
memory function position button. The adjust-
a position that allows you to see the rear ment process is stopped.
wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored. G WARNING
i If you shift the transmission to another posi- Children could become trapped if they acti-
tion, the front-passenger side exterior mirror vate the memory function, particularly when
returns to the driving position. unattended. There is a risk of injury.
Z
98 Memory function

The memory function can be used at any time,

e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the igni-
tion lock.
Storing settings
With the memory function, you can store up to
three different settings, e.g. for three different
people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rseat and backrest position
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides
X Adjust the seat (Y page 91).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's side
(Y page 95).
X Briefly press the M memory button and then
press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset
position. A tone sounds when the settings
have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting

X Press and hold the relevant preset position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exterior
mirrors are in the stored position.
i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon
as you release the storage position button.
Exterior lighting 99
Exterior lighting Automatic headlamp mode

Ã is the favored light switch setting. The light
General notes setting is automatically selected according to
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom- the brightness of the ambient light (exception:
mends that you drive with the lights switched on poor visibility due to weather conditions such as
even during the daytime. In some countries, fog, snow or spray):
operation of the headlamps varies due to legal RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the
requirements and self-imposed obligations. parking lamps are switched on/off automat-
ically depending on the brightness of the
ambient light.
Setting the exterior lighting RWith the engine running: if you have switched
on the Daytime Running Lights function
Setting options via the on-board computer, the daytime run-
ning lamps or the parking lamps and low-
Exterior lighting can be set using the: beam headlamps are switched on or off auto-
Rlight switch matically depending on the brightness of the
Rcombination switch (Y page 100) ambient light.
Lights and windshield wipers

Ron-board computer (Y page 184) X To switch on the automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to the Ã posi-
tion.
Light switch
G WARNING
Operation
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.

The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-
ing at all times.
1 W Left-hand standing lamps Canada only:
2 X Right-hand standing lamps The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and of your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-
instrument cluster lighting ning lamps function is required by law in Can-
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
by the light sensor When the engine is running and the vehicle is
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps stationary: if you move the selector lever from a
B R Rear fog lamp drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the low-beam headlamps go out after three
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-
X Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the
The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand- light switch to the T position, the daytime
ing lamps) switches off automatically if you: running lamps and parking lamps are switched
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
on.
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to the L position, the manual settings
position 0 in the ignition lock
Z
100 Exterior lighting
take precedence over the daytime running Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit
lamps. area, in accordance with the relevant legal
USA only: stipulations. Avoid using the T parking
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility lamps over a period of several hours. If pos-
of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the sible, switch on the right-hand X or left-
daytime running lamps function must be hand W standing lamps.
switched on using the on-board computer X To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
(Y page 184). The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
If the engine is running and you turn the light ment cluster lights up.
switch to the T or L position, the manual
settings take precedence over the daytime run- Standing lamps
ning lamps. Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
Low-beam headlamps
X To switch on the standing lamps: the
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is SmartKey should not be in the ignition lock or
dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head- it should be in position 0.
lamps come on when the ignition is switched on
and the light switch is set to the L position. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of
This is a particularly useful function in the event the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the
of rain and fog. vehicle).
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-
tion 2 or start the engine. Combination switch
X Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick
fog. Please take note of the country-specific
regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.
X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or
start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X To indicate briefly: press the combination
X Press the R button. switch briefly to the pressure point in the
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru- direction of arrow ; or ?.
ment cluster lights up. The corresponding turn signal flashes three
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the times.
R button. X To indicate: press the combination switch
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru- beyond the pressure point in the direction of
ment cluster goes out. arrow ; or ?.
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
i When the rear fog lamp is switched on, the turn the light switch to L or Ã.
center brake lamp in the tail lamp switches off X Press the combination switch beyond the
due to a legal requirement. pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
Parking lamps The high-beam headlamps only switch on in
the Ã position if the low-beam headlamps
! If the battery charge is very low, the parking are on.
lamps or standing lamps are automatically
switched off to enable the next engine start.
Exterior lighting 101
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- Adaptive Highbeam Assist

ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on. General notes
X To switch off the high-beam head-
lamps:move the combination switch back to You can use this function to set the headlamps
its normal position. to change between low beam and high beam
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- automatically. The system recognizes vehicles
ment cluster goes out. with their lights on, either approaching from the
opposite direction or traveling in front of your
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: vehicle, and consequently switches the head-
when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it lamps from high beam to low beam. Once the
controls activation and deactivation of the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it
high-beam headlamps (Y page 101). reactivates the high-beam headlamps.
X To switch on the high-beam flasher: pull
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the combination switch in the direction of the windshield near the overhead control panel.
arrow =.

Hazard warning lamps G WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognize other road users
that have lights, or may recognize them too
late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-
matic high-beam headlamps will not be deac-
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: tivated or will be activated regardless. There is
press button :. a risk of an accident.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
turn signal using the combination switch, only
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
the turn signal lamp on the corresponding
side of the vehicle will flash. good time.
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
press button :.
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
The hazard warning lamps automatically switch Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
on if: responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
Ran air bag is deployed or to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-
ditions.
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed
of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
standstill restricted if there is:
The hazard warning lamps switch off automati- Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above snow
6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli- Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are
cation. obscured
The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
ignition is switched off.
Z
102 Interior lighting
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Interior lighting

on/off
Overview of interior lighting
X To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the Front overhead control panel
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display lights up when it is dark and the light
sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road
users are detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users
have been detected or the roads are ade-
: p Switches the left-hand front reading

quately lit: lamp on or off
The high-beam headlamps are switched off ; c Switches the front interior lighting on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the = v Switches the rear interior lighting on or
instrument cluster goes out. The _ indi- off
cator lamp in the multifunction display
? | Switches the front interior lighting/
remains lit.
automatic interior lighting control off
X To switch off:move the combination switch
A p Switches the right-hand front reading
back to its normal position. lamp on or off
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display goes out. B Switches the automatic interior lighting con-
trol on
Rear compartment control panel

Headlamps fogged up on the inside
Certain climatic and physical conditions may
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
moisture does not affect the functionality of the
headlamp.
: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off
; p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/off
Replacing bulbs 103
Interior lighting control Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been
designed for this purpose. Only install spare
General notes bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
age.
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life
discharging, the interior lighting functions are of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with
automatically deactivated after some time your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass
except when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it
ignition lock. off with a lint-free cloth.
The color and brightness for the ambient lighting Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
may be set via the multimedia system; see the Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with
separate operating instructions. liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 103).
Automatic interior lighting control Have the bulbs that you cannot change yourself
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
X To switch on: set the switch to center posi-
tion B. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
X To switch off: set the switch to the |

position. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
The interior lighting automatically switches on if Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of
you: vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
Runlock the vehicle that these function correctly at all times. Have
Ropen a door the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Vehicles with LED headlamps: the light clus-
The interior light is activated for a short while ters of your vehicle are equipped with LED light
when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Con-
lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via tact a qualified specialist workshop which has
the multimedia system; see the separate oper- the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
ating instructions. carry out the work required.
Replacing bulbs Overview of bulb types

You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb
Important safety notes type can be found in the legend.
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its

glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if
Ryou touch it
Ritis hot
Ryou drop it
Ryou scratch it.
Z
104 Replacing bulbs
Replacing front bulbs

Removing and installing the cover in the
front wheel housing
Vehicles with halogen headlamps

: Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
; High-beam headlamps/daytime running
lamps/parking lamps/standing lamps:
H15 55 W/15 W
= Low-beam headlamps: H7 55 W You must remove the cover of the front wheel
housing before you can change the front turn

signal lamp.
X To remove: switch off the lights.
X Turn the front wheels inwards.
X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is released.
X Push cover ; down.
X To install: push cover ; up.
X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is locked.
Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) Low-beam headlamps (halogen head-
: Rear fog lamp: P 21 W lamps)
; Brake lamp: W 16 W
= Brake lamp: W 16 W
? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
A Backup lamp: W 16 W
X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing

(Y page 104).
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
Replacing bulbs 105
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Turn the bulb counter-clockwise and pull it
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. out of bulb holder :.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
right. X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise
X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing until it engages.
(Y page 104).
High-beam headlamps/daytime run- Replacing rear bulbs

ning lamps/parking lamps and stand-
Opening and closing the side trim pan-
ing lamps (halogen headlamps)
els

X Switch off the lights. View of right-hand side trim panel
X Open the hood.
You must open the side trim panel in the trunk
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
before you can replace the bulbs in the tail
remove it. lamps.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
X To open: release right or left side trim
pull out.
panel : at the top and fold it down in the
X Insert the new bulb and engage it to the stop.
direction of the arrow.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the X To close: insert side panel :.
right.
Tail lamps
Turn signals (halogen headlamps)
X Switch off the lights.
X Open the trunk.
X Open the side trim panel (Y page 105).
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the hood.
X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
pull out.
Z
106 Windshield wipers
X Press retaining clips : at the same time in ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
the direction of the arrows. windshield after the vehicle has been washed
X Carefully remove the bulb holder together in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-
with the connected plug and the bulbs. dues may be the reason for this. Clean the
windshield using washer fluid after washing
the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
Bulb holder
; Brake lamp
Combination switch
= Brake lamp
1 $ Windshield wiper off
? Rear fog lamp
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set
A Backup lamp to low sensitivity)
B Turn signals 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
X Brake lamp and backup lamp: remove the set to high sensitivity)
corresponding bulb from the bulb holder. 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
X Rear fog lamp and turn signal: press the B í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind-
bulb gently into the bulb holder, turn it coun- shield using washer fluid
ter-clockwise and remove it from the bulb X Switch on the ignition.
holder.
X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and sponding position.
turn it clockwise.
X Reinsert the bulb holder and engage on ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the windshield
retaining clips :. becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the
windshield wipers may be activated inadver-
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 105).
tently. This could then damage the windshield
wiper blades or scratch the windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch off
Windshield wipers the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Switching the windshield wipers Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or Å
position, the appropriate wiping frequency is
on/off automatically set according to the intensity of
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is
the windshield is dry, as this could damage more sensitive than in the Ä position, caus-
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col- ing the windshield wiper to wipe more fre-
lected on the windshield can scratch the glass quently.
if wiping takes place when the windshield is If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will
dry. no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield you from observing the traffic conditions.
wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
washer fluid when operating the windshield
wipers.
Windshield wipers 107
Replacing the wiper blades X Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With
the other hand, turn wiper blade in direction
Important safety notes of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as
it will go.
G WARNING X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow =
If the windshield wipers begin to move while until it engages in the removal position with a
you are changing the wiper blades, you could noticeable click.
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make

sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the
wiper.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper

arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
wiper blade back onto the windshield. arrow ? away from the wiper arm.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release the Installing the wiper blades
windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade
and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield
may be damaged by the force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Changing the windshield wiper blades

Removing the wiper blades
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
LESS-GO start function: remove the Smart-
Key from the ignition lock. X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS- in the direction of arrow :.
GO start function: switch off the engine.
X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
Z
108 Windshield wipers
X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = X Remove protective film : of the service indi-
until it engages in the locking position with a cator on the tip of the wiper blade.
noticeable click. If the color of the service indicator changes from
X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor- black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
rectly. replaced.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
i The duration of the color change varies
depending on the usage conditions.
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper
are jammed. movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the igni-
tion lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.
fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.
zles no longer hits the
center of the windshield.
Overview of climate control systems 109
Overview of climate control systems Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the
side trim panel in the cargo compartment clear
General notes (Y page 105). Otherwise the vehicle will not be
ventilated correctly.
Observe the settings recommended on the fol-
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
up. warm weather, e.g. using the convenience
To prevent the windows from fogging up: opening feature (Y page 82). This will speed
up the cooling process and the desired inte-
Climate control
Rswitch off climate control only briefly rior temperature will be reached more
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly quickly.
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-
i The integrated filter filters out most parti-
tion function cles of dust and soot and completely filters
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants
briefly, if required and odors. A clogged filter reduces the
The air-conditioning system or dual-zone auto- amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.
matic climate control regulates the temperature For this reason, you should always observe
and the humidity of the vehicle interior and fil- the interval for replacing the filter, which is
ters undesirable substances from the air. specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it
The air-conditioning system or dual-zone auto- depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
matic climate control can only be operated heavy air pollution, the interval may be
when the engine is running. Optimum operation shorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-
is only achieved with the side windows and pan- let.
orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel closed. i It is possible that under certain circumstan-
If you start the engine using your smartphone, ces the residual heat function may be activa-
the last selected climate control setting is reac- ted automatically an hour after the SmartKey
tivated (Y page 122). has been removed in order to dry the auto-
The residual heat function can only be activated matic climate control. The vehicle is then ven-
or deactivated with the ignition switched off tilated for 30 minutes.
(Y page 118).
110 Overview of climate control systems
Air-conditioning system control panel

Climate control
USA only
: Sets the temperature (Y page 115)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 116)
= Sets the air distribution (Y page 115)
? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 118)
A Sets the airflow (Y page 116)
B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 114)
C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 117)
Canada only
: Sets the temperature (Y page 115)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 116)
= Sets the air distribution (Y page 115)
? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 118)
A Sets the airflow (Y page 116)
B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 114)

C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 117)
Notes on using the air-conditioning ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
system there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
Air-conditioning system since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
Climate control
air-recirculation mode.
Below, you can find a number of notes and rec- RIf you change the settings of the climate con-
ommendations to help you use the air-condi- trol system, the climate status display
tioning system optimally. appears for approximately three seconds at
RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by turn- the bottom of the screen in the multimedia
ing control knob A clockwise to the desired system display; see separate operating
position (except position 0). instructions. You will see the current settings
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). of the various climate control functions.
RRecommendation for avoiding misted
windows at low exterior temperatures or DYNAMIC SELECT button (except
in rain: switch on the ¿ cooling with dehu- Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
midification function (Y page 114).
You can choose between various drive programs
Set air distribution to ¯ and if possible with the DYNAMIC SELECT button
switch off P and O (Y page 115). (Y page 127).
Deactivate air-recirculation mode e If you have selected drive program E:
(Y page 118).
Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is
Set airflow control A to a setting between 3
deactivated and in the warming-up phase
and 6 (Y page 116).
heat output is reduced
RRecommendation for rapid cooling or
Rthe rear window defroster running time is
heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set reduced
airflow control A to a setting between 3 and
6 (Y page 116). Depending on the configuration, climate set-
tings may also be influenced in the drive pro-
RRecommendation for a constant vehicle
gram I.
interior temperature: set airflow control A
If you have selected drive program C or S, cli-
to a setting between 1 and 3 (Y page 116).
mate settings are not influenced.
RRecommendation for air distribution in
winter: select the O and ¯ settings
(Y page 115). ECO start/stop function
Recommendation for air distribution in During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
summer: select the P or P and ¯ control system only operates at a reduced capa-
settings (Y page 115). city. If you require the full climate control output,
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function you can switch off the ECO start/stop function
briefly until the windshield is clear again. by pressing the ECO button (Y page 126).
112 Overview of climate control systems
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Climate control
USA only
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 115)
; Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 115)
= Defrosts the windshield (Y page 116)
? Increases the airflow (Y page 116)
A Sets the air distribution (Y page 115)
B Display
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 118)
D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 114)
E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 115)
F Activates or deactivates maximum cooling (Y page 117)
G Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 114)
H Reduces the airflow (Y page 116)
I Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 117)
J Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 116)
Climate control
Canada only
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 115)
; Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 115)
= Defrosts the windshield (Y page 116)
? Increases the airflow (Y page 116)
A Sets the air distribution (Y page 115)
B Display
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 118)
D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 114)
E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 115)
F Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 118)
G Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 114)
H Reduces the airflow (Y page 116)
I Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 117)
J Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 116)
Optimum use of 3-zone automatic cli- since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
mate control air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temper-
Climate control system ature settings on the driver's side for the
front-passenger side as well. The indicator
The following contains instructions and recom- lamp in the á button goes out.
mendations to enable you to get the most out of RUse the residual heat function if you want to
your dual-zone automatic climate control. heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the
RActivate climate control using the Ã and ignition is switched off. The residual heat
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the function can only be activated or deactivated
Ã and ¿ buttons light up. with the ignition switched off.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). RIf you change the settings of the climate con-
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function trol system, the climate status display
briefly until the windshield is clear again. appears for approximately three seconds at
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if the bottom of the screen in the multimedia
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in system display; see separate operating
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
114 Operating the climate control systems
instructions. You will see the current settings Dual-zone automatic climate control
of the various climate control functions.
lock (Y page 121).
DYNAMIC SELECT button (except
X To activate: press the Ã button.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
You can choose between various drive programs up. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-
with the DYNAMIC SELECT button matic mode.
(Y page 127).
Climate control
or
If you have selected drive program E: X Press the ^ button.
Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
deactivated and in the warming-up phase out. The previously selected settings are
heat output is reduced restored.
Rthe rear window defroster running time is X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
reduced The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
Depending on the configuration, climate set-
tings may also be influenced in the drive pro- i Dual-zone automatic climate control: switch
gram I. on climate control primarily using the Ã
If you have selected drive program C or S, cli- button.
mate settings are not influenced.
ECO start/stop function Switching cooling with air dehumidi-

During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
fication on/off
control system only operates at a reduced capa- General notes
city. If you require the full climate control output,
you can switch off the ECO start/stop function If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumid-
by pressing the ECO button (Y page 126). ification" function, the air inside the vehicle will
not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also
not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up
Operating the climate control sys- more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the
tems "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function
briefly.
Activating/deactivating climate con- The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
trol is only available when the engine is running. The
air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified
General notes according to the temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
When the climate control is switched off, the air the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
supply and air circulation are also switched off. normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-
The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off tion.
climate control only briefly
Activating/deactivating
Air-conditioning system
X Press the ¿ button.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
lock (Y page 121). up or goes out.
X To switch on: turn control A clockwise to The indicator lamp in the button indicates that
the desired position (except position 0) the respective function is activated. The
(Y page 110). "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
X To switch off: turn control A counter-clock- has a delayed switch-off feature.
wise to position 0 (Y page 110).
Operating the climate control systems 115
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

The indicator lamp in the Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-
¿ button flashes function.
three times or remains X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
off. The "Cooling with air
dehumidification" func-
Climate control
tion cannot be switched
on.
Setting climate control to automatic Setting the temperature

General notes Air-conditioning system
The automatic climate control function is only You can set the temperature for the entire vehi-
available in conjunction with dual-zone auto- cle. The set temperature is automatically main-
matic climate control. tained at a constant level.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is main- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
tained automatically at a constant level. The lock (Y page 121).
system automatically regulates the temperature X To increase or reduce: turn control : coun-
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-
ter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 110). Only
tribution.
change the temperature setting in small
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
is activated automatically in automatic mode.
Setting climate control to automatic Dual-zone automatic climate control

Different temperatures can be set for the driv-
er's and front-passenger sides. The set temper-
lock (Y page 121).
ature is automatically maintained at a constant
X Set the desired temperature. level.
X To activate: press the Ã button.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights lock (Y page 121).
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
activated. X To increase or decrease: turn control : or
X To switch to manual mode:press the É

E counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 112). Only change the temperature
or Ë button. setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡
or (22 †).
X Press the K or I button.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes
out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
deactivated. Setting the air distribution
Air-conditioning system
Air distribution settings
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
P Directs air through the center and side air
vents
O Directs air through the footwell air vents
i You can also activate several air distribution Setting the airflow
settings simultaneously. To do this, press
multiple air distribution buttons. The air is Air-conditioning system
then directed through various vents.
i Regardless of the air distribution setting, lock (Y page 121).
airflow is always directed through the side air X To increase or reduce: turn control A coun-
vents. The side air vents can only be closed if ter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 110).
the adjusters are turned clockwise until they
Climate control
engage.
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Setting the air distribution
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 121). lock (Y page 121).
X To increase or reduce:press the K or
X Press one or more of the P, O, ¯
buttons. I button.
The corresponding indicator lamp lights up
briefly.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
Dual-zone automatic climate control This function is only available with dual-zone
automatic climate control.
Air distribution settings
X To activate: press the á button.
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents The indicator lamp in the á button lights
P Directs air through the center and side air up.
vents The temperature setting for the driver's side
O Directs air through the footwell air vents is not adopted for the front-passenger side.
S Directs air through the center, side and X To deactivate: press the á button.
footwell vents The indicator lamp in the á button goes
b Directs air through the defroster, center out.
and side air vents The temperature setting for the driver's side
a Directs air through the defroster and is adopted for the front-passenger side.
footwell vents
_ Directs air through the defroster, center,
side and footwell vents
Defrosting the windshield
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side air General notes
vents. The side air vents can only be closed if You can use this function to defrost the wind-
the adjusters are turned clockwise until they shield or to clear a fogged up windshield and
engage. side windows.
Setting the air distribution i You should only select the "Windshield
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition defrosting" function until the windshield is
lock (Y page 121). clear again.
X Press the É or Ë button repeatedly
until the desired symbol appears in the dis- Switching the "Windshield defrosting"
play. function on or off
lock (Y page 121).
X To activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
Operating the climate control systems 117
The climate control system switches to the X To activate: press the Ù button.
following functions: The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
Rhigh airflow X To deactivate: press the Ù button.
Rhigh temperature The indicator lamp goes out. The previously
Rair distribution to the windshield and front
selected settings are restored.
side windows When you activate MAX COOL, climate control
Rair-recirculation mode off switches to the following functions:
i The "Windshield defrosting" function auto- Rmaximum cooling
Climate control
matically sets the blower output to the opti- Rmaximum airflow
mum defrosting effect. As a result, the airflow Rair-recirculation mode on
may increase or decrease automatically after
the ¬ button is pressed.
i You can adjust the blower output manually Defrosting the windows
while the "Windshield defrosting" function is
in operation: Windows fogged up on the inside
RAir-conditioning system: turn airflow con-
trol A counter-clockwise or clockwise Air-conditioning system
(Y page 110). X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumid-
RDual-zone automatic climate control: press ification" function.
the ó or ô button. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes i You should only select this setting until the
out. The previously selected settings are windshield is clear again.
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated. Dual-zone automatic climate control
or X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumid-
X Dual-zone automatic climate control: press ification" function.
the Ã button. X Activate automatic mode Ã.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
automatic mode. i You should only select this setting until the
or windshield is clear again.
X Air-conditioning system: turn temperature
control : counter-clockwise or clockwise Windows fogged up on the outside
(Y page 110).
Dual-zone automatic climate control: turn XActivate the windshield wipers.
temperature control : or E counter-clock- XSet the air distribution to P or O.
wise or clockwise (Y page 112). i You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
MAX COOL maximum cooling

Rear window defroster
The MAX COOL function is only available in vehi-
cles for the USA. General notes
MAX COOL is only operational when the engine
is running. The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon
as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
window defroster switches off automatically
after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window Activating/deactivating

defroster may switch off.
lock (Y page 121).
X Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
Climate control
Problems with the rear window defroster

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
ted prematurely or can- interior lighting or the seat heating.
not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.
Switching air-recirculation mode X To deactivate: press the e button.

on/off The indicator lamp in the e button goes
out.
General notes
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if matically:
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from Rafter approximately five minutes at outside
outside. The air already inside the vehicle will temperatures below approximately 45 ‡
then be recirculated. (7 †)
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win- Rafter approximately five minutes if the
dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation tion is deactivated
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog- Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside
ging up.
temperatures above approximately 45 ‡
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the (7 †) if the cooling with air dehumidifica-
same for all control panels. tion function is activated
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition Switching the residual heat on or off
lock (Y page 121).
General notes
X To activate: press the e button.
The indicator lamp in the e button lights The residual heat function is only available in
up. vehicles for Canada with dual-zone automatic
climate control.
Air-recirculation mode switches on automati-
cally: It is possible to make use of the residual heat of
the engine to continue heating the vehicle for
Rat high outside temperatures approximately 30 minutes after the engine has
Rat high levels of pollution been switched off. The heating time depends on
When air-recirculation mode is activated auto- the set interior temperature.
matically, the indicator lamp in the e button
is not lit. Outside air is added after about
i The blower will run at a low speed regardless
of the airflow setting.
30 minutes.
Air vents 119
i If you activate the residual heat function at Setting the air vents
high temperatures, only the ventilation will be
activated. The blower runs at medium speed.
i You cannot use the ventilation to cool the
vehicle interior to a temperature lower than
the outside temperature.
Climate control
lock or remove it (Y page 121).
X Press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up or goes out. : Side window defroster vent
The indicator lamp in the button indicates that ; Side air vent
the respective function is activated.
X To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in
i Residual heat is deactivated automatically: side air vent ; to the left.
X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
side air vent ; clockwise as far as it will go.
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops i The center and rear air vents are adjusted in
the same way.
Air vents
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and
the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow
or leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
the vehicle interior.
i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,
open the air vents completely and set the
adjusters to the central position.
Z
120 Driving
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Driving

Important safety notes Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driving G WARNING
safety systems adjusts automatically while a
certain distance is being driven after the vehicle Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
has been delivered or after repairs. Full system pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
effectiveness is not reached until the end of this The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
Driving and parking
teach-in procedure. jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

New and replaced brake pads and discs only Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
reach their optimum braking effect after several stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its per-
formance in the future. G WARNING
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles of the pedals, e.g.:
(1500 km). Rshoes with thick soles
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,
Rshoes with high heels
during this period.
Rslippers
RChange gear in good time, before the tach-
ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area There is a risk of an accident.
of the tachometer. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake usage of the pedals.
the vehicle.
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal
G WARNING
beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).
RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km),
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
drive in program E. safety-relevant functions are only available
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
vehicles: for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)
for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
of an accident.
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
RChange gear in good time.
After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increase G WARNING
the engine speed gradually and bring the vehicle If the parking brake has not been fully
to full speed. released when driving, the parking brake can:
You should also observe these notes on break-
ing-in if the engine or parts of the drive train on Roverheat and cause a fire
your vehicle have been replaced. Rlose its hold function.
Always observe the maximum permissible There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
speed. the parking brake fully before driving off.
Driving 121
! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle Start/Stop button

stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high
engine speeds and driving at full throttle until General notes
the engine has reached its operating temper- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
ature. SmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-
Only shift the automatic transmission to the GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but-
desired drive position when the vehicle is sta- ton.
tionary. A check which periodically establishes a radio
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
Driving and parking

wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
You could otherwise damage the drive train. the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when
starting the engine.
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: avoid full-load
operation and engine speeds greater than When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
5000 rpm when the engine is cold. This helps ignition lock, the system needs approximately
to protect the engine and avoids uncomfort- two seconds recognition time. You can then use
able driving. the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
succession corresponds to the different Smart-
Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
SmartKey positions case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
SmartKey If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock.
Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 70)
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
g To remove the SmartKey
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
(shift the transmission to position P)
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
1 Power supply for some consumers, such as
the windshield wipers This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO.
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote
and drive position control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:
3 To start the engine Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button.
i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition
Ryou will no longer be able to start the engine
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for
the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
The engine cannot be started. unlocked again
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button
on the front door (Y page 75), you can continue
to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for three seconds. This function
Z
122 Driving
operates independently of the ECO start/stop You must also engage park position P.
automatic engine switch-off function. X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
Key positions with the Start/Stop button lock ;.
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As
long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Driving and parking
Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/

Stop button
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be
operated
Starting the engine

: Start/Stop button
; Ignition lock Important safety notes
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the G WARNING
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
For further information on situations in which an they could:
indicator lamp either fails to go out after the Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
engine is started or lights up while driving,
please refer to "Warning and indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster" (Y page 217). Rget out and disrupt traffic.
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
being removed from the ignition.
motion if, for example, they:
X To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once. Rrelease the parking brake.
The power supply is switched on. You can now Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
activate the windshield wipers, for example. park position P
The power supply is switched off again if: RStart the engine.
Rthe driver's door is opened and
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in
this position When leaving the vehicle, always take the
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
button : twice. leave children or animals unattended in the
The ignition is switched on. vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
If you press Start/Stop button : once when reach of children.
in this position, the ignition is switched off
again. G WARNING
Removing the Start/Stop button gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
You can remove the Start/Stop button from the these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
using the SmartKey.
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
You can only switch between Start/Stop button
mode and SmartKey operation when the vehicle out sufficient ventilation.
is stationary.
Driving 123
G WARNING vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time.

Pay attention to the important safety notes.
Flammable materials introduced through
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
environmental influence or by animals can
depressed.
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
X Press the Start/Stop button once
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk (Y page 121).
of fire. The engine starts.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
Driving and parking

there are no flammable foreign materials in Starting procedure via smartphone
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system. Observe the important safety notes on starting
the engine (Y page 122).
You can also start your engine via your smart-
General notes phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the
During a cold start, the engine runs at higher previously selected climate control setting is
speeds to enable the catalytic converter to activated. In this way you can cool or heat the
reach its operating temperature. The sound of interior of the vehicle before starting the jour-
the engine may change during this time. ney.
Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is
safe to start and run the engine where your vehi-
Automatic transmission cle is parked.
X Shift the transmission to position P Observe the legal stipulations in the area where
(Y page 129). your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart-
The transmission position display in the mul- phone may be limited to certain countries or
tifunction display shows P (Y page 129). regions.
You can execute a maximum of two consecutive
i You can start the engine in transmission starting attempts via your smartphone. If you
position P and N. insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you
can carry out two more starting attempts.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey Once you have started the engine, you can
switch the engine off via your smartphone at any
To start the engine using the SmartKey instead time.
of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop
button out of the ignition lock. You can only start the engine via your smart-
phone if:
Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock
lock and release it as soon as the engine is
running (Y page 121). Rpark position P is selected
Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed
Starting procedure with the Start/Stop Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated
button Rthe panic alarm is not activated
Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the Rthe hood is closed.
vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey
into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button Rthe doors are closed and locked
must be inserted in the ignition lock and the Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed
SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for Also make sure that:
starting the engine operates independently of
Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled
the ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-
tion. Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in G WARNING

the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always
take the SmartKey with you when leaving the Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during ser-
Z
124 Driving
vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of into another transmission position when the
injury. engine is running.
Always secure the engine against uninten- i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds
tional starting before carrying out mainte- after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
verter to reach its operating temperature
nance or repair work.
more quickly.
Make sure that the engine cannot be started via Information on the automatic release of the
your smartphone before carrying out mainte- electric parking brake (Y page 142).
Driving and parking
nance or repairs. You can prevent an engine

start via your smartphone, for example, if you: Hill start assist
Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away for-
Rdo not lock the doors wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds
Ropen the hood the vehicle for a short time after you have
removed your foot from the brake pedal. This
gives you enough time to move your foot from
Pulling away the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
General notes G WARNING
G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
If the engine speed is above the idling speed ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
and you engage transmission position D or R, There is a risk of an accident and injury.
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
a risk of an accident. brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
When engaging transmission position D or R, leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do assist.
not simultaneously accelerate. Hill start assist is not active if:
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a
away. downhill gradient.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled Rthe transmission is in position N.
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. Rthe electric parking brake is applied.
You can open the doors from the inside at any RESP® is malfunctioning.
time. Further information on holding the vehicle sta-
You can also deactivate the automatic locking tionary on uphill gradients (Y page 133).
feature (Y page 184).
It is only possible to shift the transmission from
position P to the desired position if you depress ECO start/stop function
the brake pedal. Only then can the parking lock
be deactivated. Introduction
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): if you do not depress the brake pedal, the The ECO start/stop function switches the
DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped
parking lock remains engaged. under certain conditions.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you do not depress The engine starts automatically when the driver
the brake pedal, the selector lever can still be wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop
moved but the parking lock remains engaged. function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel
consumption and emissions of your vehicle.
At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡
(Ò20 †), you can only shift out of park position P
Driving 125
Important safety notes Rthe hood is closed.

Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
G WARNING seat belt is fastened.
If the engine is switched off automatically and All of the vehicle's systems remain active when
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted the engine is stopped automatically.
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. The HOLD function can also be activated if the
There is a risk of accident and injury. engine has been switched off automatically. It is
then not necessary to continue applying the
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off brakes during the automatic stop phase. When
Driving and parking

the ignition and secure the vehicle against you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine
rolling away. starts automatically and the braking effect of
the HOLD function is deactivated.
General notes Automatic engine switch-off can take place a
maximum of four times in a row (initial stop, then
three subsequent stops).
Automatic engine start

The engine starts automatically if:
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by
pressing the ECO button
: ECO start/stop display Rin transmission position D or N the brake
pedal is released and the HOLD function is not
The ECO start/stop function is activated when- active
ever you start the engine using the SmartKey or
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal
the Start/Stop button.
Ryou engage reverse gear R
If the engine has been switched off automati-
cally by the ECO start/stop function, the è Ryou move the transmission out of position P
ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis- Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-
play. er's door
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop Rthe vehicle starts to roll
function is only available in drive program C. Rthe brake system requires this
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
Automatic engine switch-off ates from the set range
Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
the ECO start/stop function switches off the shield when the air-conditioning system is
engine automatically. switched on
Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low
The ECO start/stop function is operational
when: Shifting the transmission to position P does not
start the engine.
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green.
Rthe outside temperature is within the range
that is suitable for the system.
Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera-
ture.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
Rthe system detects that the windshield is not
fogged up when the air-conditioning system is
switched on.
Z
126 Driving
Deactivating or activating the ECO AMG Performance exhaust system

start/stop function (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
You can choose between different AMG Per-
formance exhaust system volumes using the
position of the exhaust flap.
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, the quietest set-
ting is activated.
Driving and parking
X To deactivate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then Setting the volume:
not be switched off automatically when the vehi- X Press button :.
cle stops. If you select the loudest setting, indicator
lamp ; lights up.
Problems with the engine

The engine does not The HOLD function or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
start. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 156) or Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC (Y page 154).
X Try to start the engine again.
The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. Before attempting to start the engine again:
X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 122). Avoid excessively long
and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the
battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 127

The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 273).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
Driving and parking

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
The engine is not running There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
smoothly and is misfir- component of the engine management system.
ing. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
gauge shows a value longer being cooled sufficiently.
above 248 ‡ (120 †). X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
The coolant warning cool down.
lamp may also be on and
X Check the coolant level (Y page 257). Observe the warning notes
a warning tone may
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
sound.
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles

except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the

drive program. Depending on the drive program
selected the following vehicle characteristics
will change:
Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
Rthe suspension (vehicles with damping sys-
tem or AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-
tem) X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
Rthe steering. times as necessary until the desired drive
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function program is selected.
Rthe climate control The selected drive program appears in the
multifunction display. After five seconds the
Each time you start the engine with the Smart- display goes out and the status icon of the
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is selected drive program appears.
activated. For further information about starting
the engine, see (Y page 122).
Z
128 DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
In addition, the current drive program settings

are displayed briefly in the multimedia system
display.
i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func-
tion is deactivated at the factory due to the
available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO
start/stop function is not available in any
drive program, regardless of the display in the
multimedia system display.
Driving and parking
Available drive programs:
C Comfort Comfortable and economi-

cal driving characteristics X Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as many
S Sport Sporty driving characteris- times as necessary until the desired drive
tics program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
I Individual Individual settings multifunction display. After five seconds the
display goes out and the status icon of the
E Economy Particularly economical selected drive program appears.
driving characteristics The drive program indicator on DYNAMIC
SELECT controller : lights up in red.
Additional information for drive programs Available drive programs:
(Y page 133).
You can also change gear yourself using the I Individual Individual settings
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-
mation on the manual drive program C Comfort Comfort-oriented, opti-
(Y page 135). mum-economy engine and
transmission settings
S Sport Sporty engine and trans-
DYNAMIC SELECT controller mission settings
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty trans-
mission settings
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change
the drive program. Depending on the drive pro- Race Maximum sportiness and
gram selected the following vehicle character- engine and transmission
istics will change: settings suitable for the
Rthe drive
racetrack
Rthe transmission management
RESP®
Additional information for drive programs
(Y page 133).
Rthe suspension (vehicles with AMG adaptive
You can also change gear yourself using the
sport suspension system) steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function mation on the manual drive program
Rthe availability of gliding mode (Y page 135).
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is
activated. For further information about starting
the engine, see (Y page 122).
Automatic transmission 129
Automatic transmission The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its

original position. The current transmission posi-
Important safety notes tion P, R, N or D appears in the transmission
position display in the multifunction display
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R, Transmission position and drive pro-
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is gram display
Driving and parking

a risk of an accident. The current transmission position and drive pro-
When engaging transmission position D or R, gram appear in the multifunction display.
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident. : Transmission position
; Gear
After switching off the engine, always switch
= Drive program display
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking The arrows in the transmission position display
show how and into which transmission positions
brake. you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
If the transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display is not working, you should pull
DIRECT SELECT lever away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
Overview of transmission positions should select transmission position D and drive
program E or S.
Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle
is moving, do not shift the automatic trans-
mission directly from D to R, from R to D or
directly to P. The automatic transmission
could otherwise be damaged.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction
of arrow P.
Transmission position display P is shown in
j Park position with parking lock the multifunction display.
k Reverse gear When you have engaged park position P, make
i Neutral sure that the transmission position display
h Drive shows P in the multifunction display.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- You can only engage park position P when the
cles): the DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of vehicle is stationary.
the steering column. Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT
For information on the selector lever in SELECT lever up or down disengages the park-
Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 131). ing lock. The transmission is in N neutral.
Z
130 Automatic transmission
At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
(Ò20†), you can only shift out of park position P motion if, for example, they:
into another transmission position when the
engine is running. Rrelease the parking brake.
In order to shift from park position P directly into Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
R or D: park position P
Rdepress the brake pedal and RStart the engine.
Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Driving and parking
past the first point of resistance

Engaging park position P automatically SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Park position P is automatically engaged if: vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey reach of children.
and remove the SmartKey
Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey X If the transmission is in position D or R: push
or using the Start/Stop button and open the the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the
driver's door or front-passenger door first point of resistance.
Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is X If the transmission is in position P: depress
stationary or when driving at a very low speed the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
and the transmission is in position D or R lever up or down to the first point of resist-
ance.
Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-
mission shifts automatically to transmission If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
position P if the HOLD function or Distance Pilot sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-
DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the informa- sion shifts to N automatically.
tion on the HOLD function (Y page 156) and on With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 153). er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic
Engaging reverse gear R transmission shifts to P automatically.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
! Only shift the automatic transmission to R the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
when the vehicle is stationary. the automatic transmission shifts to P automat-
X Depress the brake and keep it pressed. ically.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the If you want the automatic transmission to
first point of resistance. remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle
The ECO start/stop function is not available cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing
when reverse gear is engaged. Further informa- system:
tion on the ECO start/stop function X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button:
(Y page 125). remove the Start-Stop button from the igni-
tion lock.
Shifting to neutral N X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
G WARNING X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, depressed.
they could: X Shift to neutral N.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other X Release the brake pedal.
people or road users. X Release the electric parking brake.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
Engaging drive position D Engaging park position P

X If the transmission is in position R or N: push
the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first
point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position P: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever down past the first point of resistance.
Driving and parking

Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
Overview of transmission positions
X When the vehicle is stationary, press but-
ton :.
Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
X Depress the brake and keep it pressed.
X Push the selector lever forwards past the first
j Park position with parking lock

k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
Transmission position and drive pro-

gram display
The current transmission position and drive pro-
gram appear in the multifunction display.
: Transmission position display

; Drive program display
If the transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display is not working, you should pull
away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
should select transmission position D and drive
program C or S.
Z
Transmission positions A Neutral

Do not shift the transmission to N
B Park position while driving. Otherwise, the auto-
This prevents the vehicle from rolling matic transmission could be dam-
away when stopped. aged.
Only shift the transmission into posi- No power is transmitted from the
tion P when the vehicle is stationary. engine to the drive wheels.
The parking lock should not be used Releasing the brakes will allow you to
Driving and parking
as a brake when parking. Always move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push
apply the electronic parking brake in it or tow it.
addition to the parking lock in order
to secure the vehicle. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position N if the
If the vehicle electronics are malfunc- vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.
tioning, the transmission may be on icy roads.
locked in position P. Have the vehicle
electronics checked immediately at a If you switch the engine off with the
qualified specialist workshop. transmission in position R or D, the
automatic transmission shifts to N
Park position P is automatically
automatically.
engaged if:
Ryou switch off the engine using the ! Rolling in neutral N can damage
SmartKey and remove the Smart- the drive train.
Key 7 Drive
Ryou switch off the engine using the
The automatic transmission changes
SmartKey or using the Start/Stop gear automatically. All forward gears
button and open the driver's door are available.
or front-passenger door
Rthe driver's door is opened when
the vehicle is stationary or driving
at very low speed and the trans- Driving tips
mission is in position D or R
Changing gear
C Reverse gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the indi-
Only shift the transmission into posi- vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-
tion R when the vehicle is stationary. mission position D. This automatic gear shifting
behavior is determined by:
Rthe selected drive program
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Accelerator pedal position

Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill For further information on kickdown in manual
gradients drive program M (Y page 137).
G WARNING Rocking the vehicle free

If the clutch overheats, the electronic man-
Shifting the transmission repeatedly between
agement system is automatically deactivated. gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if it
This interrupts the power transmission. The has become stuck in slush or snow. The vehi-
vehicle may, for example, roll backwards on cle's engine management system limits the
Driving and parking

gradients. There is a risk of an accident. speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when
Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill shifting back and forth. To shift back and forth
between transmission positions D and R, move
gradients by depressing the accelerator. the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past the
The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehicle
stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the
accelerator pedal. If the clutch overheats, a
warning tone sounds. Drive programs
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG
cles): the Stop Vehicle Shift to 'P'
Leave Engine Running display message vehicles)
appears in the multifunction display. You will
only be able to continue your journey once the Drive program C (Comfort)
clutch has cooled down and the display mes- Drive program C is characterized by the follow-
sage in the multifunction display has disap- ing:
peared. Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the Trans. Oil handling characteristics.
Overheated Drive on with Care display Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
message appears in the multifunction display. and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
Do not hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gra- pedal is depressed fully.
dients by depressing the accelerator pedal. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for
Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary on example on slippery road surfaces.
uphill gradients by:
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
Rdepressing the brake pedal automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
Ractivating the HOLD function The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
Rengaging the electric parking brake range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
Drive program S (Sport)
Kickdown Drive program S is characterized by the follow-
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. ing:
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Rsporty engine settings.
pressure point. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower The fuel consumption possibly being higher
gear depending on the engine speed. as a result of the later automatic transmission
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the shift points.
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to
use kickdown in the automatic drive program
and the temporary manual drive program M.
When manual drive program M is permanently
activated, kickdown is not possible.
Z
Drive program I (Individual) When you depress the brake pedal, gliding
In drive program I the following properties of the mode is deactivated, depending on pedal
drive program can be selected: pressure.
When you activate cruise control or Distance
Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage- Pilot DISTRONIC, gliding mode is not availa-
ment) ble.
Rthe suspension (vehicles with damping sys-
tem or AMG adaptive sport suspension sys- Mercedes-AMG vehicles
tem)
Driving and parking
Rthe steering
Drive program I (Individual)
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
In drive program I the following properties of the
Rthe climate control drive program can be selected:
Information about configuring drive program I Rthe drive (engine management)
with the multimedia system can be found in the
Rthe transmission management
Digital Operator's Manual.
Rthe suspension (vehicles with AMG adaptive
i To permanently select the gears in drive sport suspension system)
program I using the steering wheel paddle RESP®
shifters, select the M (manual) setting for the
drive. Information about configuring drive program I
with the multimedia system can be found in the
Drive program E (Economy) Digital Operator's Manual.
Drive program E is characterized by the follow- Drive program C (Comfort)
ing:
Drive program C is characterized by the follow-
Rcomfort-oriented engine settings. ing:
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
handling characteristics.
Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
pedal is depressed fully.
pedal is depressed fully.
Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for
Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for
example on slippery road surfaces.
example on slippery road surfaces.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
at lower engine speeds and the wheels being
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
less likely to spin.
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
Rgliding mode is activated automatically when
Rgliding mode is available.
engine-internal conditions are fulfilled and
the accelerator is not depressed. At the same Rthe ECO start/stop function is available.
time the transmission’s clutch opens and the Drive program S (Sport)
vehicle rolls freely using its kinetic energy. As
a result great distances can be completed Drive program S is characterized by the follow-
without the engine brake and fuel consump- ing:
tion reduced. Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-
i The availability of gliding mode depends on istics.
various factors, including the following: Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
Rthe engine and transmission temperature
as a result of the later automatic transmission
Rthe downhill gradient shift points.
Rthe vehicle speed Rthe suspension exhibits stiff springing and
Rperforming regular adaptation functions damping settings (vehicles with AIR adaptive
sport suspension system).
Rgliding mode is not available. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manual shift-

Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. ing, you have two options:
Rtemporary setting
Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)
Rpermanent setting
Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-
lowing: If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-
function display will show the current gear
Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving instead of transmission position D.
characteristics. If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears
Driving and parking

Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. will be selected automatically.
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission Temporary setting
shift points.
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff
springing and damping settings (vehicles with
AMG adaptive sport suspension system).
Rgliding mode is not available.
Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.
Drive program RACE (vehicles with AMG

adaptive sport suspension system)
The RACE drive program is characterized by the
following:
Rthe vehicle exhibits driving characteristics
suitable for the racetrack. X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
Rall vehicle systems are set for maximum position D.
sportiness. X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;.
Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.
Temporary setting will be active for a certain
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as
amount of time. Under certain conditions the
a result of the later automatic transmission minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the
shift points. case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly hard phase or when driving on steep terrain.
springing and damping settings. X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle
Rgliding mode is not available. shifter ; and hold it in place.
Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. or
X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position.
Manual gear shifting or
X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
General notes
use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change
You can change gear yourself using the steering the drive program.
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use the DYNAMIC
in position D. SELECT controller to change the drive pro-
Depending on which steering wheel paddle gram.
shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
immediately shifts into the next gear down or
up, if permitted.
Z
Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-

vehicles) cles): if the maximum engine speed on the
currently engaged gear is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic trans-
mission automatically shifts up in order to
prevent engine damage.
X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
Driving and parking
the next gear.

Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-
ing.
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine
speed when shifting down, the automatic
transmission protects against engine damage
X To activate: shift the selector lever to posi- by not shifting down.
tion P.
X Press button :.
Shift recommendation
X To deactivate: press button :.
or
X If position D (automatic transmission) is
selected for the transmission in drive pro-
gram I: shift to drive program I with the
DYNAMIC SELECT controller.
Shifting gears
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
transmission does not shift up automatically ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
even when the engine limiting speed for the display.
current gear is reached. When the engine lim- X Shift to recommended gear ; according to
iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to gearshift recommendation : when shown in
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always the multifunction display.
make sure that the engine speed does not
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage. Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
! The automatic transmission does not shift
up automatically even when the engine limit-
ing speed for the current gear is reached.
When the engine limiting speed is reached,
the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine
from overrevving. Always make sure that the
engine speed does not reach the red area of
the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of
engine damage.
X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle

shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
Refueling 137
During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using

the steering wheel paddle shifters.
If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
mission shifts up to the next gear when the
maximum engine speed is reached. This pre-
vents the engine from overrevving.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to
use kickdown in temporary manual drive pro-
Before the engine speed reaches the red area, gram M. When manual drive program M is per-
Driving and parking

an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi- manently activated, kickdown is not possible.
function display.
X Shift to recommended gear : when mes-
sage ; is shown in the multifunction display.
Kickdown
X For maximum acceleration, depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.
is deteriorating. X Stop the vehicle.
The transmission no lon- X Shift the transmission to position P.
ger shifts into all of the
X Switch off the engine.
gears.
Reverse gear can no lon- X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
ger be engaged. X Shift the transmission to position D.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Refueling You must avoid fire, open flames, creating

sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
Important safety notes and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
G WARNING refueling.
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
G WARNING
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion. Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
Z
138 Refueling
You must make sure that fuel does not come Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge
could build up again.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, For further information on fuel and fuel quality
observe the following: (Y page 309).
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
Driving and parking
using soap and water.

Refueling
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with General information
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
Pay attention to the important safety notes
out delay.
(Y page 137).
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
The fuel filler flap is unlocked/locked automat-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ically when you unlock/lock the vehicle with the
ing. SmartKey.
RImmediately change out of clothing which The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
has come into contact with fuel. æ in the instrument cluster. The arrow on the
filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.
G WARNING
Opening the fuel filler flap
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could : To open the fuel filler flap
result in damage to the fuel system and the ; Tire pressure table
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop = To insert the fuel filler cap
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely. ? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted or KEYLESS‑GO
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the X Open the driver's door.
paintwork. The vehicle electronics now have status 0.
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. This is the same as the SmartKey having been
The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system removed.
could otherwise be blocked by particles from X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
the fuel can. arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
Refueling 139
X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-
remove it. cle.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the
inside of fuel filler flap ;. 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel sage appears in the multifunction display
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and (Y page 204).
refuel. In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle lamp may light up (Y page 222).
switches off. For further information on warning and indicator
Driving and parking

lamps in the instrument cluster, see
Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops (Y page 222).
filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak
out.
Closing the fuel filler flap

X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
vehicle.
G WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the
SmartKey having been removed.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 69).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 71).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
Z
140 Parking
Parking Switching off the engine

Important safety notes Important safety notes
G WARNING G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or The automatic transmission switches to neu-
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with tral position N when you switch off the engine.
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
Driving and parking
gas flow. There is a risk of fire. accident.

Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- After switching off the engine, always switch
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to cle from rolling away by applying the parking
park on dry grassland or harvested grain brake.
fields.
Automatic transmission
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- X Apply the electric parking brake.
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): shift the transmission to position P.
Rrelease the parking brake.
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly against X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press button :.
rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-
etrain could be damaged. X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to
position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally: The immobilizer is activated.
X With the Start/Stop button: press the
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.
Start/Stop button (Y page 121).
Rthe transmission must be in position P and the The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in
transmission position display must show P. the instrument cluster go out.
Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the igni- When the driver's door is closed, this corre-
tion lock. sponds to SmartKey position 1. When the
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front driver's door is open, this corresponds to
wheels must be turned towards the curb. SmartKey position 0: "Key removed".
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-
sion shifts to N automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
Parking 141
the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic The function of the electric parking brake is
transmission shifts to P automatically. dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in
the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the system, it may not be possible to apply the
the automatic transmission shifts to P automat- released parking brake.
ically. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
If you want the automatic transmission to level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling
remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle away.
cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing X Shift the automatic transmission to position
Driving and parking

system: P.
X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button: It may not be possible to release an applied
remove the Start-Stop button from the igni- parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
tion lock. there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. qualified specialist workshop.
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. The electric parking brake performs a function
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it test at regular intervals while the engine is
depressed. switched off. The sounds that can be heard while
this is occurring are normal.
X Shift to neutral N.
X Release the brake pedal.
Applying or releasing manually
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
Electric parking brake

General notes
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease the parking brake. X To engage: push handle :.
When the electric parking brake is applied,
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
parking position P. only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
Rstart the engine. ment cluster.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- The electric parking brake can also be applied
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of when the SmartKey is removed.
an accident and injury. X To release: pull handle :.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
goes out.
The electric parking brake can only be
released:
Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 121) or
Rif the ignition was switched on using the
Start/Stop button
Z
142 Parking
Applying automatically If your seat belt is not fastened, the following

conditions must be fulfilled to automatically
The electric parking brake is automatically release the electric parking brake:
applied when the transmission is in position P
Rthe driver's door is closed.
and:
Ryou have shifted out of transmission position
Rthe engine is switched off or
P or you have previously driven faster than
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the 2 mph (3 km/h).
driver's door is opened Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator
To prevent the electric parking brake from being
Driving and parking
pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking

automatically applied, pull handle :. brake will be released and the vehicle will start
The electric parking brake is also engaged auto- to move.
matically if:
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle Emergency braking
to a standstill or
The vehicle can also be braked during an emer-
Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
gency by using the electric parking brake.
tionary
X While driving, push handle : of the electric
RParking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationary
parking brake (Y page 141).
In addition, at least one of the following condi- The vehicle is braked as long as you keep
tions must be fulfilled: handle : of the electric parking brake
Rthe engine is switched off pressed. The longer the electric parking brake
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the handle : is depressed, the greater the brak-
driver's door is opened ing force.
Rthere is a system malfunction During braking:
Rthe power supply is insufficient Ra warning tone sounds
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period Rthe Release Parking Brake message
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) appears
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
out. only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
The electric parking brake is not automatically flashes
engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
start/stop function. still, the electric parking brake is engaged.
Releasing automatically
Parking the vehicle for a long period
Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-
matically released if all of the following condi- If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
tions are met: four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
Rthe engine is running. exhaustive discharging.
Rthe transmission is in position D or R. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six
Rthe seat belt has been fastened.
weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
result of lack of use.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek
If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lid
advice.
must be closed.
i You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Driving tips 143
Driving tips tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-

play.
General notes Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-
Important safety notes rain.
G WARNING Drinking and driving
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available G WARNING
Driving and parking

with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
for example, the power steering and the brake driving are very dangerous combinations.
boosting effect. You will require considerably Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
of an accident. ment.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
dent is greatly increased when you drink or
G WARNING take drugs and drive.
If you operate mobile communication equip- Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
ment while driving, you will be distracted from anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
traffic conditions. You could also lose control ing drugs.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle Emission control
is stationary.
G WARNING
Observe the legal requirements for the country Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-
hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
driving a vehicle. these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
If you make a call while driving, always use is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
when the traffic situation permits. If you are out sufficient ventilation.
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone. Certain engine systems are designed to keep
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph the level of poisonous components in exhaust
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a fumes within legal limits.
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec- These systems only work at peak efficiency if
ond. they are serviced exactly in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. Always have
Drive sensibly – save fuel work on the engine carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
Observe the following tips to save fuel: mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
RThe tires should always be inflated to the rec- Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work
ommended tire pressure. relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
must be carried out at a qualified specialist
RRemove unnecessary loads.
workshop.
RRemove roof racks when they are not needed.
The engine settings must not be changed under
RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. service work must be carried out at regular
RHave all maintenance work carried out as intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-
indicated by the service intervals in the Main- Benz service requirements. Details can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
Z
144 Driving tips
ECO display The ECO display consists of three sections, with

an inner and outer area. The sections corre-
The ECO display shows you how economical spond to the following three categories:
your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
in achieving the most economical driving style : Acceleration (evaluation of the
for the selected settings and prevailing condi- acceleration processes):
tions. Your driving style can significantly influ- Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
ence the vehicle's consumption. area lights up green: moderate
acceleration, especially at higher
Driving and parking
speeds
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: sporty acceler-
ation
; Coasting (evaluation of all decelera-
tion processes):
: Acceleration Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
; Coasting area lights up green: anticipatory
= Constant driving, keeping your distance and
? Additional range achieved early release of the accelerator.
Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and The vehicle can coast without use
represents the additional range achieved since of the brakes.
the beginning of the journey as a result of an Rthe outer area empties and the
adapted driving style. inner area is gray: frequent heavy
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve braking
range, the Fuel Low message is shown in the = Constant(continuous evaluation
multifunction display instead of range ?. The over the entire journey):
8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster
also lights up (Y page 222). Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
area lights up green: constant
speed and avoidance of unneces-
sary acceleration and deceleration
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: fluctuations in
speed
The three inner areas display the current driving

style and light up green as a result of a particu-
larly economical driving style. Depending on the
driving situation, up to two areas may light up
simultaneously.
At the beginning of the journey, the three outer
areas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-
nomical driving. A higher level indicates a more
economical driving style. If the three outer areas
are completely filled at the same time, the driver
has adopted the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
tions. The ECO display border lights up.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel
consumption. The additionally achieved range
displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not
indicate a fixed consumption reduction.
Driving tips 145
In addition to driving style, the actual consump- helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and
tion is affected by other factors, such as: wearing them out excessively.
RLoad When you take advantage of engine braking, it
RTire pressure is possible that a drive wheel will not rotate for
some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface.
RCold start
This could cause damage to the drive train.
RChoice of route This type of damage is not covered by the
RActive electrical consumers Mercedes-Benz warranty.
These factors are not included in the ECO dis- Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal on
Driving and parking

play. downhill gradients while the manual drive pro-
An economical driving style specially requires gram M is temporarily activated: the automatic
driving at moderate engine speeds. transmission may switch to the last active auto-
Achieving a higher value in the categories matic drive program E or S. The automatic trans-
"Acceleration" and "Constant": mission may shift to a higher gear. This can
reduce the engine's braking effect.
Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
Rdrive the vehicle in drive program C or E
Heavy and light loads
(vehicles with a DYNAMIC SELECT button).
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the G WARNING
highway, only the outer area for "constant" will
change. If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
The ECO display summarizes the driving style driving, the braking system can overheat. This
from the start of the journey to its completion. increases the stopping distance and can even
Therefore, there are more marked changes in cause the braking system to fail. There is a
the outer areas at the start of a journey. On lon- risk of an accident.
ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For more Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
marked changes, perform a manual rest
(Y page 178). depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
For more information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 177).
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
Braking
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
Important safety notes load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive
on for a short while. This allows the airflow to
G WARNING cool the brakes more quickly.
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Wet roads
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
There is an increased danger of skidding and without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
accidents. tion from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- been washed or driven through deep water.
ing on a slippery road surface.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
Downhill gradients vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
! On long and steep gradients, you must washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
lower gear in good time. This allows you to brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
take advantage of engine braking. For this you and protecting them against corrosion.
must first activate manual gearshifting. This
Z
146 Driving tips
Limited braking performance on salt- Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
treated roads replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi- moderate loads, you should test the functional-
due may form on the brake discs and brake ity of your brakes at regular intervals.
pads. This can result in a significantly longer
You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS)
braking distance.
on (Y page 60).
RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have
brakes occasionally while paying attention to
brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle
Driving and parking
the traffic conditions.

which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent
beginning and end of a journey. quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles
ahead. or which are not of an equivalent quality could
affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Servicing the brakes Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
brake fluid that has been specially approved for
! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-
Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
the instrument cluster and fluid which has not been approved for
Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an
running equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
operating safety.
Observe additional warning messages in the
multifunction display.
Checking brake lining thickness
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. You can measure the break pad/lining thick-
Have the brake system checked immediately. ness using a test gage. Color-coding (green or
Consult a qualified specialist workshop to red) on the test gage allows you to determine
arrange this. whether the brake pad/lining thickness is still
sufficient. The test gage is in the vehicle docu-
! A function or performance test should only ment wallet in the glove box.
be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If
you wish to operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop in advance. You could oth-
erwise damage the drive train or the brake
system.
! As the ESP® system operates automatically,
the engine and the ignition must be switched
off (the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in
the ignition lock) if:
Rthe electric parking brake is tested on a
brake dynamometer (for a maximum of
ten seconds)
Rthe vehicle is towed with the front axle
raised.
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may
seriously damage the brake system.
All checks and maintenance work on the brake Front wheel
system must be carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Driving tips 147
Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on
the road surface, there is a danger of hydro-
planing occurring, even if:
Ryou drive at low speeds
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth
Driving and parking

For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
you must drive in the following manner:
Rlower your speed
Ravoid ruts
Ravoid sudden steering movements
Rbrake carefully
Rear wheel
Driving on flooded roads
X Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable
position so that you can attach test gage A. ! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away the depth of any water before driving through
(Y page 140). it. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-
X Engage park position P. erwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or
the engine compartment. This can damage
the electronic components in the engine or
X Place test gage A between the wheel's the automatic transmission. Water can also
spokes on brake pad/lining =. be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles
X Hold test gage A vertically on brake disc : and this can cause engine damage.
and slide measuring pin ; onto brake
disc :.
X Check which color field ? the arrow on Winter driving
measuring pin ; is pointing to.
Green: the brake pad/lining thickness is suf- G WARNING
ficient. If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is not an attempt to increase the engine's braking
sufficient. Have the brake pads/lining effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
To avoid an inaccurate measurement: accidents.
Rmake sure you position the wheels suitably Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
Rdo not put the measuring pin on a recess in ing on a slippery road surface.
the brake disc
G DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
Z
148 Driving systems
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating relieves the load on the brake system and pre-
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area vents the brakes from overheating and wearing
too quickly.
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
When the engine is running, you can use the
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a cruise control lever to limit the speed to any
window on the side of the vehicle that is not speed between 20 mph (30 km/h) and the tech-
facing into the wind. nically permitted maximum speed of the vehicle.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady
Driving and parking
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. speed for a prolonged period.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur- The speed indicated in the speedometer may
faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and differ slightly from the speed stored.
braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control or
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed: If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-
X Shift the transmission to position N. trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control
X Try to bring the vehicle under control using
cannot take into account the road, traffic and
corrective steering. weather conditions. Cruise control is only an
The outside temperature indicator is not aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
designed to serve as an ice-warning device and vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. good time and for staying in your lane.
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- Do not use cruise control:
played after a short delay.
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in
point do not guarantee that the road surface is heavy traffic or on winding roads
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
wooded areas or on bridges.
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
You should pay special attention to road condi- traction and the vehicle could then skid
tions when temperatures are around freezing
Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
point.
snow
For more information on driving with snow
chains, see (Y page 285). If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (Y page 284).
Cruise control lever
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-
tion (Y page 284).
Driving systems
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed
for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
exceeding the set speed. On long and steep
downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is
laden, you must select a low gear in good time. : Activates or increases speed
You need to have selected manual drive pro- ; Activates or reduces speed
gram M (Y page 135). By doing so, you will make
use of the braking effect of the engine. This
Driving systems 149
= Deactivates cruise control X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
? Activates at the current speed/last stored you ?.
speed X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
When you activate cruise control, the stored
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed is shown in the multifunction display for
speed of the vehicle to the previously stored
five seconds.
speed.
Activation conditions
Setting a speed
Driving and parking

To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled: Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
Rthe electric parking brake must be released. the speed set.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
X To adjust the set speed in10 km/hincre-
Rthe transmission must be in position D. ments:briefly press cruise control lever : up
beyond the pressure point for a higher speed,
Storing, maintaining and calling up a or down ; for a lower speed.
speed or
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond
Storing and maintaining the current the point of resistance until the desired speed
speed is set. Press cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
You can store the current speed if you are driv-
ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). X To adjust the set speed in1 km/hincre-
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. ments:briefly press cruise control lever up :
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or
to the pressure point for a higher speed or
down ; for a lower speed.
down ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
or
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto- X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the
matically maintains the stored speed. point of resistance until the desired speed is
set. Press cruise control lever up : for a
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
evens out. Cruise control maintains the depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if
stored speed on downhill gradients by auto- you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con-
matically applying the brakes. trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished overtak-
Storing the current speed or calling up the ing.
last stored speed
G WARNING Deactivating cruise control
If you call up the stored speed and it differs There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- trol:
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or =.
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- or
dent. X Brake.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
Rthe vehicle is secured with the electric park-
do not know the stored speed, store the
ing brake
desired speed again.
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)
Z
150 Driving systems
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® i USA only: This device has been approved by
Ryou shift the transmission to position N while the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The
driving radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ ing, or altering of the device will void any war-
trol Off message in the multifunction display ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
for approximately five seconds. not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way.
i When you switch off the engine, the last Any unauthorized modification to this device
Driving and parking
speed stored is cleared. could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only: This device complies with
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
General notes
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed ference, and
and automatically helps you maintain the dis- 2. This device must accept any interference
tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles received, including interference that may
are detected with the aid of the radar sensor cause undesired operation of the device.
system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes auto- Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
matically to avoid exceeding the set speed or to will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
maintain the designated distance from the vehi- Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
cle in front. approved way.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there is Any unauthorized modification to this device
a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually could void the user's authority to operate the
and acoustically. Without your intervention, Dis- equipment.
tance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a colli-
sion. An intermittent warning tone will then
sound and the distance warning lamp will light Important safety notes
up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately
in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in G WARNING
front or take evasive action provided it is safe to Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react to:
do so.
Rpeople or animals
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range
between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph Rstationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped
(200 km/h). or parked vehicles
Change into a lower gear in good time on long Roncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may
important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you
will make use of the braking effect of the engine. neither give warnings nor intervene in such
This relieves the load on the brake system and situations. There is a risk of an accident.
prevents the brakes from overheating and wear- Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
ing too quickly. uation and be ready to brake.
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC on roads
with steep gradients. G WARNING
For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must be Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always
operational. clearly identify other road users and complex
Since Distance Pilot DISTRONIC transmits radar traffic situations.
waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of
the responsible authorities. You can refer to the
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
questions are asked about this.
Driving systems 151
In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect nar-
row vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then vehicles driving on a different line.
brake the vehicle In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
Rneither give a warning nor intervene impaired if:
Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
Driving and parking

Rthere is interference by other radar sources
brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
warns you. ple, in parking garages
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a
G WARNING vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle to the speed stored.
with up to 50% of the maximum possible This speed may:
deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi- Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or
cient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you an exit lane
with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand lane
risk of an accident. that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand
Apply the brakes yourself in these situations lane
and try to take evasive action. Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-
cles driving in the right lane
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle driver of the speed stored.
brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Cruise control lever
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions. Dis-
tance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
and for staying in your lane. : Stores the current speed or a higher speed
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: ; Stores the current speed or a lower speed
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
= Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in ? Stores the current speed or calls up the last
heavy traffic or on winding roads stored speed
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- A Sets a specified minimum distance
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
Z
152 Driving systems
Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

Activation conditions Activating at the current speed/last
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the stored speed
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
Driving and parking

stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
Rin the car wash
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the fol-
lowing conditions must be fulfilled: Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to
do not know the stored speed, store the
two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC is ready for use. desired speed again.
Rthe electric parking brake must be released.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
RESP® must be active, but not intervening. you ?.
RParking Pilot must not be activated. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Rthe transmission must be in position D. The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you activated, it stores the current speed or reg-
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be ulates the speed of the vehicle to the previ-
fastened. ously stored speed.
Rthe front-passenger door must be closed.
Pulling away and driving
Rthe vehicle must not skid.
X If you want to pull away with Distance
Activating Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?, up : or down ;. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. you ?.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or or
down ; until the desired speed is set. X If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated:
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is
stored speed. detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to
the set speed.
i If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the Distance Pilot Passive mes- The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
sage appears in the multifunction display. The an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-
set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then
front will then not be maintained. You will be brakes automatically. Be ready to brake at all
driving at the speed you determine by the times.
position of the accelerator pedal. If there is no vehicle in front, Distance Pilot
You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise
when stationary. The lowest speed that can be control.
set is 20 mph (30 km/h). If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slower-
moving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In
this way, the distance you have selected is main-
tained.
Driving systems 153
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a faster- When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated,
moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving the transmission is shifted automatically to
speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated position P if:
up to the speed you have stored. Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated driver's door is open.
when you depress the brake, except when the Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
vehicle is stationary. matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
Selecting the drive program
Driving and parking

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty automatically if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
driving style when you select the S+ drive pro- activated when the vehicle is stationary and:
gram (Mercedes-AMG vehicles only), S Ra system malfunction occurs.
(Y page 133) or the manual drive program
Rthe power supply is insufficient.
(Y page 135). Acceleration behind the vehicle in
front or to the set speed is then noticeably more If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may
dynamic. If you have selected the E (Mercedes- also shift into position P automatically.
AMG vehicles: C) drive program, the vehicle
accelerates more gently. This setting is recom- Setting a speed
mended in stop-and-start traffic.
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
Changing lanes until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
If when driving on multilane roads you wish to the speed set.
change to the overtaking lane, Distance Pilot X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
DISTRONIC supports you if: higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre-
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is maintaining the ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly press
distance to a vehicle in front the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
the pressure point.
The last stored speed increases or decreases
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments.
detect a danger of collision X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincre-
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly press
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
changing lanes takes too long or if the distance the pressure point.
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front The last stored speed increases or decreases
becomes too small. in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.
Stopping i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you
vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot
until it is stationary. DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta- last speed stored after you have finished over-
tionary and you do not need to depress the taking.
brake.
i After a time, the electric parking brake Setting a specified minimum distance
secures the vehicle and relieves the service You can set the specified minimum distance for
brake. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time
i Depending on the specified minimum dis- span between one and two seconds. With this
tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at function you can set the minimum distance that
a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehi-
front. The specified minimum distance is set cle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You
using the control on the cruise control lever. can see this distance in the multifunction dis-
play (Y page 154).
Z
154 Driving systems
The specified minimum distance can be the multifunction display for approximately five
changed while Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is seconds.
switched on or off.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
i Make sure that you maintain the minimum you switch off the engine. Distance Pilot
distance to the vehicle in front as required by DISTRONIC is not deactivated if you depress
law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front the accelerator pedal.
if necessary. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac-
tivated if:
Driving and parking
Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the

vehicle is automatically secured with the elec-
tric parking brake
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you
in order to pull away and the front-passenger
door or one of the rear doors is open
Rthe vehicle is skidding
Ryou switch on Parking Pilot
X To increase: turn control = in direction ;. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. The
greater distance between your vehicle and Distance Pilot Off message appears in the
the vehicle in front. multifunction display for approximately five sec-
X To decrease: turn control = in direction :. onds.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac-
shorter distance between your vehicle and tivated if you activate DSR. The Ã DSR sym-
the vehicle in front. bol appears in the multifunction display.
Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in

the instrument cluster
Displays in the speedometer
There are several ways to deactivate Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :. When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated and
there are no vehicles detected in front, one or
or two segments ; in the speed range set light up.
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, front, segments ; between speed of the vehi-
the Distance Pilot Off message appears in cle in front = and stored speed : light up.
Driving systems 155
i For design reasons, the speed displayed in = Own vehicle

the speedometer may differ slightly from the ? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC active (text only
speed set for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. appears when the cruise control lever is
actuated
Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
deactivated X Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 182).
In the Assistance menu (Y page 182) of the on-
board computer, you can select the assistance
display. Tips for driving with Distance Pilot
Driving and parking

DISTRONIC
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect
vehicles during cornering is limited. Your vehi-
cle may brake unexpectedly or late.
RDriving on a different line: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles which are
not driving in the middle of their lane. The dis-
Assistance graphic tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
: Vehicle in front, if detected ROther vehicles changing lanes: Distance Pilot
; Distance indicator, current distance to the DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cut-
vehicle in front ting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be
= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle too short.
in front; adjustable RNarrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
? Own vehicle has not yet detected the vehicle in front on
X Select the Assistance Graphic function the edge of the road because of its narrow
using the on-board computer (Y page 182). width. The distance to the vehicle in front will
be too short.
Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is RObstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance
activated Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles
or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
You will initially see the stored speed for about detected vehicle turns a corner and an obsta-
five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot cle or stationary vehicle is then revealed, Dis-
DISTRONIC. tance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for
them.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC may mistakenly
detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. If
you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the
following situations, the vehicle could pull
away unintentionally:
- At traffic lights with crossing traffic, for
example.
- With a vehicle ahead on the other side of an
intersection and the HOLD function active.
In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC will then be deactivated.
Assistance graphic
: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
Z
156 Driving systems
HOLD function Activation conditions

General notes You can activate the HOLD function if:
Rthe vehicle is stationary
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
following situations:
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes function
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is
Rwhen waiting in traffic fastened
Driving and parking
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver Rthe electric parking brake is released
having to depress the brake pedal. RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD Rthe transmission position D, R or N is engaged
function deactivated when you depress the while driving a vehicle with an automatic
accelerator pedal to pull away. transmission
Important safety notes Activating the HOLD function

G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake X Make sure that the activation conditions are
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. met.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- X Depress the brake pedal.
partment, the battery or the fuses have X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
been tampered with. until : appears in the multifunction display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
Rthe battery is disconnected
release the brake pedal.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off i If depressing the brake pedal the first time
does not activate the HOLD function, wait
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle briefly and then try again.
against rolling away.
Deactivating the HOLD function
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle The HOLD function is deactivated automatically
brakes automatically in certain situations. if:
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD transmission: only when the transmission is in
function in the following or similar situations: position D or R.
Rwhen towing the vehicle Rthe transmission is in position P on vehicles
Rin the car wash with automatic transmission.
Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 156). Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-
tain amount of pressure until : disappears
from the multifunction display.
Ryou activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park-
ing brake.
Driving systems 157
i After a time, the electric parking brake X Quickly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
secures the vehicle and relieves the service X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
brake. accelerator pedal depressed.
When the HOLD function is activated, the trans- The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
mission is shifted automatically to position P if: ation.
Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the i Activate ESP® as soon as the acceleration
driver's door is open. process has ended. ESP® will otherwise not
be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
Driving and parking

matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function. Canceling start-off assist
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
automatically if the HOLD function is activated X Reactivate ESP®.
when the vehicle is stationary and:
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is insufficient. RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
Start-off assist (except Mercedes- Important safety notes
AMG vehicles)
i RACE START must not be used on normal
Important safety notes roads. RACE START must only be activated
and used on dedicated road circuits, outside
G WARNING of public road use.
If you use start-off assist, individual wheels i RACE START is only available in
may start to spin and the vehicle may skid. If Mercedes‑AMG vehicles.
ESP® is deactivated, there is a greater danger G WARNING
of skidding and having an accident. Make sure If you use RACE START, individual tires may
that no persons or obstacles are in the vicinity start to spin and the vehicle could skid.
of the vehicle.
Depending on the selected ESP® mode, there
Start-off assist enables optimum acceleration is an increased risk of skidding and having an
from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-grip accident. Make sure that no persons, animals
road surface is required, along with the tires and or obstacles are within range of the vehicle.
vehicle being in proper operating condition.
Do not activate start-off assist on public roads. RACE START enables optimal acceleration from
Observe the safety notes on driving safety sys- a standing start. For this, a suitably high-grip
tems (Y page 60). road surface is required, along with the tires and
vehicle being in proper operating condition.
Be sure to read the safety notes and information
on ESP® (Y page 63). i Observe the safety notes on driving safety
systems (Y page 60).
Activating start-off assist Be sure to read the safety notes and informa-
tion on ESP® (Y page 63).
X Deactivate ESP® (Y page 182).
X Turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead Conditions for activation
position.
X Depress the brake pedal hard with your left You can activate RACE START if:
foot and keep it depressed. Rthe doors, hood and the trunk lid are closed.
X Shift the transmission to position D. Rthe engine is running and the transmission,
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to select all-wheel drive clutch and the engine are at
the S drive program (Y page 127). operating temperature.
Z
158 Driving systems
Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
position. reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h.
Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is RACE START is deactivated immediately if you
depressed (left foot). release the accelerator pedal during RACE
Rthe transmission is in position D. START or if any of the activation conditions are
Rone of the drive programs S, S+ or RACE is
no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐
sible or RACE START Canceled message
selected. (Y page 128)
appears in the multifunction display.
Driving and parking
Activating RACE START i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a

short period of time, it is only available again
X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot after the vehicle has been driven a certain
and keep it depressed. distance.
X Pull and hold both steering wheel paddle shift-
ers.
X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-
Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in tem
the multifunction display.
X Release both steering wheel paddle shifters. General notes
i If the activation conditions are no longer ful- The electronically controlled damping system
filled, RACE START is canceled. The RACE works continuously. This improves driving
START Not Possible See Operator's safety and ride comfort.
Manual message appears in the multifunction The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
display. and depends on:
X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
shifter (Y page 135).
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
or
Ryour individual selection of "Sport" or "Com-
X To confirm: pull the right steering wheel pad-
fort"
dle shifter (Y page 135).
The RACE START Available Depress gas The suspension setting is adjusted using the
pedal message appears in the multifunction corresponding button in the center console.
display. i The mode can also be set using the AMG
i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 128).
within a few seconds, RACE START is can- Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
celed. The multifunction display shows the Key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is
RACE START Canceled message. activated. For further information about starting
X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. the engine, see (Y page 122).
The engine speed is increased.
The RACE START Release brake to start Sport mode
message appears in the multifunction display.
i If you do not release the brake pedal within
a short time, RACE START will be canceled.
The multifunction display shows the RACE
START Canceled message.
X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
ation.
The RACE START Active message appears in
the multifunction display.
Driving systems 159
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
Sport mode ensures even better contact with effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you
the road. Select this mode when employing a use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains
sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country if necessary.
roads.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected Suspension with Adaptive Damping
Sport mode. System
The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes-
Driving and parking

sage appears in the multifunction display. General notes
A suspension with the Adaptive Damping Sys-
Comfort mode tem provides improved driving comfort and con-
tinuously controls the calibration of the damp-
In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of ers. The damping characteristics adapt to the
your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this current operating and driving situation.
mode if you favor a more comfortable driving
style, but also when driving fast on straight The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
roads, e.g. highways. and depends on:
X Press button : again so that indicator Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
lamp ; goes out. Rthe road surface conditions
You have selected Comfort mode. Rthe drive program selected
The AMG Suspension System COMFORT mes- The drive program can be set using the
sage appears in the multifunction display. DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 127).
Selecting Comfort mode

4MATIC
In the Comfort drive program, the driving char-
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. acteristics of your vehicle are more comforta-
This may damage the differential. Damage of ble. Therefore, select this drive program if you
this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz prefer a more comfortable driving style. Also
Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain select the Comfort drive program when driving
either on the ground or be fully raised. fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches
Observe the instructions for towing the vehi- of highway.
cle with all wheels in full contact with the X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 127)
ground. as many times as necessary until the Com-
4MATIC, together with ESP®, improves the trac- fort drive program is selected.
tion of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel
spins due to insufficient grip. Selecting Sport mode
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
neither reduce the risk of accident nor override The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take the Sport drive program ensures even better
account of road, weather and traffic conditions. contact with the road. Select this drive program
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle winding country roads.
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 127)
your lane. as many times as necessary until the Sport
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: drive program is selected.
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
RAccelerate less when driving.
Z
160 Driving systems
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Range of the sensors

Important safety notes General notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into
parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area account obstacles located:
around your vehicle using six sensors in the Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-
front bumper and six sensors in the rear mals or objects.
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging
Driving and parking
and audibly indicates the distance between your loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods
vehicle and an object. vehicles.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and
exiting a parking space. When maneuvering,
parking or pulling out of a parking space, make
sure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the area in which you are maneuver-
ing.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such as
flower pots or trailer drawbars. Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
when they are in the immediate vicinity of the (example)
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the
objects. The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.
They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean
The sensors may not detect snow and other the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. or damage them (Y page 262).
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
wash, the compressed-air brakes of a truck or Range
a pneumatic drill could cause Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not function
correctly on uneven terrain.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-
matically when you:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
Rrelease the electric parking brake
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactiva-
ted at lower speeds.
: Detection range of front sensors

; Detection range of rear sensors
Driving systems 161
Front sensors Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yel-

low segments showing operational readiness =
Center Approx. 40 in (approx. light up.
100 cm) The gear lever position or the transmission posi-
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. tion of the automatic transmission and the
60 cm) direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
mine which warning display is active when the
engine is running.
Rear sensors
Driving and parking

Transmission posi- Warning display
Center Approx. 48 in (approx. tion
120 cm)
D Front area activated
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.
80 cm) R, N or the vehicle is Rear and front areas
rolling backwards activated
Minimum distance P No areas activated
Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

One or more segments light up as the vehicle
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-
cle's distance from the obstacle.
If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel- From the:
evant warning displays light up and a warning Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min- mittent warning tone for approximately two
imum, the distance may no longer be shown. seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
Warning displays warning tone for approximately two seconds.
This indicates that you have now reached the
minimum distance.
Deactivating or activating Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC
: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-

cle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance : Indicator lamp
between the sensors and the obstacle. The ; Deactivates or activates Parking Assist
warning display for the front area is located on PARKTRONIC
the dashboard above the center air vents. The If indicator lamp : is lit, Parking Assist
warning display for the rear area is located on PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
the headliner in the rear compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments.
Z
162 Driving systems
i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-

cally activated when you turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deacti-
Driving and parking
the Parking Assist vated.

PARKTRONIC warning X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a
displays are lit. You also qualified specialist workshop.
hear a warning tone for
approximately two sec-
onds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the indi-
cator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments in The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-
the Parking Assist ference.
PARKTRONIC warning X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 262).
displays are lit. Parking
X Switch the ignition back on.
Assist PARKTRONIC is
then deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
sound waves.
X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different
location.
Parking Pilot When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactiva-

ted, Parking Pilot is also unavailable.
General notes
G WARNING
Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with While parking or pulling out of a parking
ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suit-
able parking space. Active steering intervention onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
and brake application can assist you during result in a collision with another road user.
parking and when exiting a parking space. Park- There is a risk of an accident.
ing Assist PARKTRONIC is also available Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
(Y page 160). vehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilot
parking procedure.
Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a replace- ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-
ment for your attention to your immediate sur- cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp
roundings. You are always responsible for safe angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking wheels or tires.
space. Make sure that no persons, animals or
objects are in the maneuvering range.
Driving systems 163
Parking Pilot may also display spaces not suita- You may cause a collision as a result. There is
ble for parking, e.g.: a risk of an accident.
Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
If objects are located above the detection
Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
range, stop and deactivate Parking Pilot.
Ron unsuitable surfaces
Parking tips: For further information on the detection range
ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking
(Y page 160).
space as possible. Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
Driving and parking

RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown
spaces perpendicular to the direction of travel if:
might be identified or measured incorrectly. Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next
RParking spaces that are partially occupied by to one another
trailer drawbars might not be identified as Rthe parking space is directly next to a low
such or be measured incorrectly. obstacle such as a low curb
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking Ryou forward-park
space being measured inaccurately. Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
RPay attention to the warning messages of spaces parallel or perpendicular to the direction
Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC during the parking of travel if:
procedure (Y page 161). Rthe parking space is on a curb
RYou can intervene to correct the steering pro- Rthe system reads the parking space as being
cedure at any time. Parking Pilot will then be blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-
canceled. ing blocks
RWhen transporting a load that protrudes from Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-
your vehicle, you must not use Parking Pilot. ver into
RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
mounted. e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
RMake sure that the tire pressures are always
correct. This has a direct influence on the
parking characteristics of the vehicle.
Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are:
Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to the direc-
tion of travel
Ron straight roads, not bends
Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the
: Detected parking space on the left
pavement
; Parking symbol
= Detected parking space on the right
Detecting parking spaces
Parking Pilot is activated automatically when
Objects located above the detection range of driving forwards. The system is operational at
Parking Pilot will not be detected when the park- speeds of up to approximately 22 mph
ing space is measured. These are not taken into (35 km/h). While in operation, the system inde-
account when the parking procedure is calcula- pendently locates and measures parking spaces
ted, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or on both sides of the vehicle.
loading ramps. Parking Pilot will only detect parking spaces:
G WARNING Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to the direc-
If there are objects above the detection range: tion of travel
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and
RParking Pilot may steer in too early at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects
Z
164 Driving systems
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and whilst the vehicle is parking. You are respon-
at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi- sible for braking in good time.
cle X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-
Rthat are at right angles to the direction of bol shows the desired parking space in the
travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than instrument cluster.
your vehicle X Shift the transmission to position R.
i Note that Parking Pilot cannot measure the The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
length of a parking space if it is at right angles % message appears in the multifunction
display.
Driving and parking
to the direction of travel. You will need to

judge whether your vehicle will fit into the X To cancel the procedure:press the %
parking space. button on the multifunction steering wheel or
When driving at speeds below 19 mph pull away.
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as a or
status indicator in the instrument cluster. When X To park using Parking Pilot: press the a
a parking space has been detected, an arrow button on the multifunction steering wheel.
towards the right or the left also appears. Park- The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
ing Pilot only displays parking spaces on the and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
front-passenger side as standard. Parking sage appears in the multifunction display.
spaces on the driver's side are displayed as
soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
activated. When parking on the driver's side, X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all
this must remain activated until you confirm the times. When backing up, drive at a speed
use of Parking Pilot by pressing the a button below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-
on the multifunction steering wheel. The system erwise Parking Pilot is canceled.
automatically determines whether the parking Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
space is parallel or at right-angles to the direc- when the vehicle approaches the rear border
tion of travel. of the parking space.
A parking space is displayed while you are driv- Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft spaces.
(15 m) away from it. The Parking Pilot Active Select D
Observe Surroundings message appears in
Parking the multifunction display.
X Shift the transmission to position D while the
G WARNING vehicle is stationary.
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
braked by Parking Pilot, it could roll away if: direction.
Rthere
The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
is a malfunction in the system or in
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
the voltage supply. sage appears in the multifunction display.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- i You will achieve the best results by waiting
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam- for the steering procedure to complete before
pered with. pulling away.
Rthe battery is disconnected. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle times.
Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
occupant.
when the vehicle approaches the front border
There is a risk of an accident. of the parking space.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
against rolling away. spaces.
The Parking Pilot Active Select R
i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects Observe Surroundings message appears in
obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically the multifunction display.
Driving systems 165
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects

the Parking Pilot Ended message appears in obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically
the multifunction display and a warning tone whilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space.
sounds. The vehicle is now parked. You are responsible for braking in good time.
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver X Start the engine.
having to depress the brake pedal. The braking
effect is canceled when you depress the accel-
erator pedal. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you
will drive out of the parking space.
Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steer-
Driving and parking

ing interventions and brake applications. When X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
Parking Pilot is ended, you must steer and brake The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
again yourself. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is % message appears in the multifunction
still available. display.
Parking tips: X To cancel the procedure:press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-
pull away.
ing space after parking is dependent on vari-
ous factors. These include the position and or
shape of the vehicles parked in front and X To exit a parking space using Parking
behind it and the conditions of the location. It Pilot: press the a button on the multi-
may be the case that Parking Pilot guides you function steering wheel.
too far into a parking space, or not far enough The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
into it. In some cases, it may also lead you and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
across or onto the curb. If necessary, you sage appears in the multifunction display.
should abort the parking procedure with Park- X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
ing Pilot. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do
RYou can also select preselect transmission not exceed a maximum speed of approx-
position D. The vehicle redirects and does not imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-
drive as far into the parking space. Should the ing space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot is can-
transmission change take place too early, the celed immediately.
parking procedure will be canceled. A sensi- X Depending on the message or as required,
ble parking position can no longer be ach- shift the transmission to position D or R.
ieved from this position. Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
direction. The Parking Pilot Active
Exiting a parking space Accelerate and Brake Observe Sur‐
roundings message appears in the multi-
In order for Parking Pilot to support you when function display.
exiting the parking space:
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
Ryou need to have parked using Parking Pilot. for the steering procedure to complete before
Rthe border of the parking space must be high pulling away.
enough at the front and the rear. A curb stone If you back up after activation, the steering
is too small, for example. wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
Rthe border of the parking space must not be tion.
too wide, as the position of the vehicle must X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by
not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
position as it is maneuvered into the parking plays, several times if necessary.
space.
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft Once you have exited the parking space com-
(1.0 m) must be available. pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the
Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a park- Parking Pilot Finished message appears in
ing space only if you have parked the vehicle the multifunction display. You will then have to
parallel to the direction of travel using Parking steer and merge into traffic on your own. Park-
Pilot. ing Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You can
Z
166 Driving systems
take over the steering before the vehicle has Rear view camera
exited the parking space completely. This is
useful, for example when you recognize that it is General notes
already possible to pull out of the parking space.
Canceling Parking Pilot

X Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Driving and parking
Parking Pilot is canceled immediately. The

Parking Pilot Canceled message appears
in the multifunction display.
or
X Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 161).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off
and Parking Pilot is immediately canceled.
The Parking Pilot Canceled message Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
appears in the multifunction display. maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your
Parking Pilot is canceled automatically when: vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-
tem display.
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
Rtransmission position P is selected mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
Rparking using Parking Pilot is no longer pos-
sible i The text shown in the multimedia system
display depends on the language setting. The
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
following are examples of rear view camera
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. In messages in the multimedia system display.
such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up in Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 262).
the instrument cluster
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-
appears and the multifunction display shows the Important safety notes
Parking Pilot Canceled message. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
When Parking Pilot is canceled, you must steer replacement for your attention to your immedi-
and brake again yourself. ate surroundings. You are always responsible
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneu-
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the vering or parking, make sure that there are no
accelerator again. persons, animals or objects in the area in which
you are maneuvering.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function in
a limited manner:
Rif the trunk lid is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
ter
Driving systems 167
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed

Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 262)
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
case, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
Driving and parking

license plate holder, bicycle rack).
Activating/deactivating the rear view

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
camera imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is vehicle
in position 2 in the ignition lock. ; White guide line without turning the steering
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear wheel, vehicle width including the exterior
function is selected in the multimedia system; mirrors (static)
see the Digital Operator's Manual. = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
The area behind the vehicle is shown with steering wheel angle (dynamic)
guide lines in the multimedia system display. ? Yellow lane marking of the tires at current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
The image from the rear view camera is avail-
able throughout the maneuvering process.
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
vates if you shift the transmission to P or after
driving forwards a short distance.
Messages in the multimedia system dis-

play
The rear view camera may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
The rear view camera does not show objects in
the following positions:
A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
Rvery close to the rear bumper imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
Runder the rear bumper cle
Rin close range above the handle on the trunk B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
lid C Bumper
! Objects not at ground level may appear to D Red guide line at a distance of approximately
be further away than they actually are, e.g.: 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
Z
168 Driving systems
= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 167).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
Driving and parking
X With the help of white guide line :, check

whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
: Front warning display X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
; Additional measurement operational readi- back up until you reach the end position.
ness indicator for Parking Assist Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
PARKTRONIC parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
= Rear warning display
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera- Reverse perpendicular parking with the
tional (Y page 161), additional measurement steering wheel at an angle
operational readiness indicator ; appears in
the multimedia system display. If the Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active
or light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the multi-
media system display.
"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space
without turning the steering wheel
: Parking space marking

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 167).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
: White guide line without turning the steering steering wheel in the direction of the parking
wheel, vehicle width including the exterior space until yellow guide line ; reaches park-
mirrors (static) ing space marking :.
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width X Keep the steering wheel in that position and
including the exterior mirrors, for current back up carefully.
Driving systems 169
Driving and parking

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width : Red guide line at a distance of approximately
including the exterior mirrors, for current 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
steering wheel angle (dynamic) ; White guide line without turning the steering
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in wheel
front of the parking space. = End of parking space
The white lane should be as close to parallel X Back up carefully until you have reached the
with the parking space marking as possible. final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the
parking space.
Wide-angle function
: White guide line at current steering wheel

angle
; Parking space marking
X Turn the steering wheel to the center position
while the vehicle is stationary.
: Symbol for the wide-angle view function
; Own vehicle
= Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
plays
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,
for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is
active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph
Z
170 Driving systems
(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST You can have current status information dis-
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas- played in the assistance menu (Y page 182) of
ing lapses in concentration on the part of the the on-board computer.
driver, it suggests taking a break. X Select the Assistance display for Attention
Assist using the on-board computer
Important safety notes (Y page 182).
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It The following information is displayed:
might not always recognize fatigue or increasing RLength of the journey since the last break.
Driving and parking
inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them RThe Attention Level determined by ATTEN-
at all. The system is not a substitute for a well- TION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five
rested and attentive driver. levels from high to low
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not the attention level and cannot output a warn-
occur at all: ing, the System Passive message appears.
Rif the length of the journey is less than approx- The bar display then changes the display,
imately 30 minutes such as when you are driving at a speed below
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
is uneven or if there are potholes (200 km/h).
Rif there is a strong side wind
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
eration board computer (Y page 183).
Rif you are predominantly driving slower than The system determines the attention level of
37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph the driver depending on the setting selected:
(200 km/h)
Standard selected: the sensitivity with which
Rif the time has been set incorrectly
the system determines the attention level is set
Rin active driving situations, such as when you to normal.
change lanes or change your speed Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue higher. The attention level detected by Attention
your journey and starts assessing your tiredness Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is
again if: warned earlier.
Ryou switch off the engine When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driv- é symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to play in the assistance graphic display.
take a break When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated,
it is automatically reactivated after the engine
Displaying the attention level has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-
responds to the last selection activated (stand-
ard/sensitive).
Warning in the multifunction display

If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration
are detected, a warning appears in the multi-
function display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a
Break!.
In addition to the message shown in the multi-
function display, you will then hear a warning
tone.
Driving systems 171
X If necessary, take a break. As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
X Confirm the message by pressing the a warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
button on the steering wheel. an accident.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good Always observe the traffic conditions care-
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still
detects increasing lapses in concentration, you
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
will be warned again after 15 minutes at the
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
earliest. This will only happen if ATTEN-
Driving and parking

attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of
sufficient distance to the side for other road
fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.
users and obstacles.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys-
tem: if a warning is output in the multifunction i USA only:
display, a service station search is performed in This device has been approved by the FCC as
the multimedia system. You can select a service a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
station and navigation to this service station will is intended for use in an automotive radar
then begin. This function can be activated or system only. Removing, tampering with, or
deactivated in the multimedia system; see the altering the device will void any warranties,
Digital Operator's Manual. and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-
per with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.
Lane Tracking package Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
General notes equipment.
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Radar sensors
Spot Assist (Y page 171) and Lane Keeping The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-
Assist (Y page 172). grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the
bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The
Blind Spot Assist sensors must not be covered, for example by
cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a
General notes severe impact or in the event of damage to the
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors
side of the vehicle that are not visible to the checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen- Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.
sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors
draws your attention to vehicles detected in the
Monitoring range of the sensors
monitored area. If you then switch on the cor- In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
responding turn signal to change lane, you will impaired if:
also receive an optical and audible warning. Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of covering the sensors
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain or snow
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
G WARNING motorbike or bicycle
Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rthe road has very wide lanes
Rthe road has narrow lanes
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
placing them in the blind spot area
Rthere are barriers or other road boundaries
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
differential and overtake your vehicle
indicated.
Z
172 Driving systems
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps
(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to it. is adjusted automatically according to the ambi-
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the ent light.
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv- Collision warning
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of
case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-
of their lane. sponding turn signal, a double warning tone
Due to the nature of the system: sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn
Driving and parking
signal remains on, vehicles detected are indica-

Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :.
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane There are no further warning tones.
borders.
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving Switching on Blind Spot Assist
alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated
trucks, for a prolonged time. in the on-board computer (Y page 183).
Warning display
lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.
Lane Keeping Assist

General notes
: Warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow
at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds
above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp
goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot your vehicle by means of multifunction cam-
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph era : which is attached behind the top of the
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond- windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects
ing side lights up red. This warning is always lane markings on the road and can warn you
emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot before you leave your lane unintentionally.
monitoring range from behind or from the side. This function is available in the range between
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
occurs if the difference in speed is less than A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
7 mph (12 km/h). over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist up to 1.5 seconds.
is no longer active.
Driving systems 173
Important safety notes Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small
and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-
G WARNING ted
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
recognize lane markings. branch off, cross one another or merge
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
Rgive an unnecessary warning
the roadway
Rnot give a warning
Driving and parking

There is a risk of an accident. Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
the on-board computer; to do so, select
situation and stay in lane, in particular if Standard or Adaptive (Y page 183).
warned by Lane Keeping Assist. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
G WARNING the lines in the assistance graphics display
(Y page 182) are shown in green. Lane Keep-
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
ing Assist is ready for use.
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
a risk of an accident. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
You should always steer, brake or accelerate Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-
ing Assist. tain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep- BAS or ESP®.
ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
dent nor override the laws of physics. Lane When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
Keeping Assist cannot take into account the tion occurs if:
road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep- Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this
ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi- tain period of time.
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay- Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
ing in your lane. BAS or ESP®.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi- Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
cle in the lane. Ryou brake hard.
The system may be impaired or may not function Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
if: obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, In order that you are warned only when neces-
fog or spray sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the ing, the system recognizes certain conditions
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if and warns you accordingly.
the road surface is wet) The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
ity of the camera bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings
for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction Rthe system detects solid lane markings.
work The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov- Rthe road has narrow lanes.
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Z
174 Displays and operation
Important safety notes The brightness control knob is located on the

bottom left of the instrument cluster
(Y page 32).
G WARNING X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or
On-board computer and displays
If you operate information systems and com- counter-clockwise.

munication equipment integrated in the vehi- If the light switch is set to the Ã, T or
cle while driving, you will be distracted from L position, the brightness is dependent
traffic conditions. You could also lose control upon the brightness of the ambient light.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this Speedometer with segments
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention The speedometer is divided into segments on
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
ment when the vehicle is stationary. The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
You must observe the legal requirements for the RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated
country in which you are currently driving when (Y page 150):
operating the on-board computer.
One or two segments in the set speed range
G WARNING light up.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
front moving more slowly than the stored
functioned, you may not recognize function
speed:
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The
The segments between the speed of the vehi-
operating safety of your vehicle may be cle in front and the stored speed light up.
impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- Tachometer
ately.
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this
The on-board computer only shows messages or could damage the engine.
warnings from certain systems in the multifunc- The red band in the tachometer indicates the
tion display. You should therefore make sure engine's overrevving range.
your vehicle is operating safely at all times. The engine is limited within a range to protect
If the operating safety of your vehicle is the engine when the red band is reached.
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
For an overview, see the instrument panel illus- Outside temperature display
tration (Y page 32).
You should pay special attention to road condi-
point.
Displays and operation
Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-
Instrument cluster lighting play indicates the temperature measured and
does not record the road temperature.
The light sensor in the instrument cluster auto- The outside temperature display is in the multi-
matically controls the brightness of the multifunction display (Y page 176).
function display. In daylight, the displays in the
instrument cluster are not illuminated. There is a short delay before a change in outside
temperature appears in the multifunction dis-
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the display.
plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can
be adjusted using the brightness control knob.
Displays and operation 175
Coolant temperature gauge Operating the on-board computer

G WARNING Overview
Opening the hood when the engine is over-

heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
! A display message is shown if the coolant

temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡
(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine
will otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperature gage is in the instru-
ment cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 32). : Multifunction display
The H marking in the coolant temperature gauge ; Right control panel
corresponds to a coolant temperature of = Left control panel
approximately 248 ‡ (120 †).
Under normal operating conditions and at the X To activate the on-board computer: turn
correct coolant level, the coolant temperature the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
gauge may rise to the H marking. You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using the
buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Left control panel
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar

;
9 Press briefly:
: RScrolls in lists
RSelects a submenu or function
RIn the Audio menu: selects the
previous or next station, when the
preset list or station list is active,
or an audio track or video scene
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
selects a name or telephone num-
ber
Z
176 Displays and operation
9 Press and hold: ~ RRejectsor ends a call

: RIn the Audio menu: selects a pre- RExits
the telephone book/redial
set list or a station list in the memory
desired frequency range, or an
6 RMakes or accepts a call

audio track or video scene using
RSwitches to the redial memory
rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open Multifunction display
a RConfirms the selection or display
message
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
starts dialing the selected number
% Press briefly:
RBack
RVehicles with Audio 20: switches
off voice-operated control of the
navigation (see manufacturer's
operating instructions)
RVehicles with COMAND: switches
off the Voice Control System (see
the separate operating instruc-
tions)
RHides display messages or calls up
the last Trip menu function used : Permanent display: outside temperature or
RExits the telephone book/redial speed (Y page 184)
memory ; Time
% Press and hold: = Text field
RCalls up the standard display in the
? Menu bar
Trip menu A Drive program (Y page 129)
B Transmission position (Y page 131)
Right control panel In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, the indicators in the
lower and upper part of the multifunction display
ó RVehicles with Audio 20: differ from the displays shown here.
Switches on voice-operated con- X To display menu bar?: press the =
trol for navigation (see manufac- or ; button on the steering wheel.
turer's operating instructions) If you do not press the buttons any longer,
RVehicles with COMAND:
menu bar ? is faded out after a few seconds.
Switches off the Voice Control Text field = shows the selected menu or sub-
System (see the separate operat- menu as well as display messages.
ing instructions) i Set the time using the multimedia system;
8 RMute see the separate operating instructions.
The following messages may appear in the
W RAdjusts the volume multifunction display:
X
RZGearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (Y page 135)
Rj Parking Pilot (Y page 162)
Menus and submenus 177
RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 148) Trip computer "From Start" or "From
R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Reset"
(Y page 101)
Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 125)

Rë HOLD function (Y page 156)
Menus and submenus

Menu overview
: Distance
Using the = or ; button on the steering ; Driving time
wheel, open the menu bar.
= Average speed
Operating the on-board computer (Y page 175).
? Average fuel consumption
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus: X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
RTrip menu (Y page 177)
X Press the 9 or : button to select
RNavi menu (navigation instructions) From Start or From Reset.
(Y page 178)
RAudio
The values in the From Start submenu are cal-
menu (Y page 180)
culated from the start of a journey whilst the
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 180)
values in the From Reset submenu are calcu-
RDriveAssist menu (assistance) lated from the last time the submenu was reset
(Y page 182) (Y page 178).
RServ. menu (Y page 183) In the following cases, the trip computer is auto-
RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 183) matically reset From Start:
RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
(Y page 185) than four hours.
The displays for the Audio, Navi and Tel menus R999 hours have been exceeded.
may differ slightly to those in your vehicle. R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
The examples given in this Operator's Manual When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been
apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND. exceeded, the trip computer is automatically
reset From Reset.
Trip menu ECO display

Standard display The ECO display is not available in Mercedes-
AMG vehicles.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO
DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
matically reset.
X Press and hold the % button on the steer- For more information on the ECO display, see
ing wheel until the Trip menu with trip odom- (Y page 144).
eter : and odometer ; appears.
Z
178 Menus and submenus
Displaying the range and current fuel multifunction display and not in the digital
consumption speedometer display.
Resetting values

X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X Press a to confirm.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only shows X Press : to select Yes and press a to
range :. confirm.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering You can reset the values of the following func-
wheel to select the Trip menu. tions:
X Press 9 or : to select the display with RTrip odometer
approximate range : and current fuel con- R"From Start" trip computer
sumption ;.
R"From Reset" trip computer
Approximate range : that can be covered is
calculated according to your current driving RECO display
style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If If you reset the values in the ECO display, the
there is only a small amount of fuel left in the values in the "From Start" trip computer are also
fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"
appears instead of approximate range :. trip computer, the values in the ECO display are
Recuperation display = shows you if energy also reset.
has been recuperated from the kinetic energy
in overrun mode and saved in the battery.
Recuperation display = depends on the Navigation system menu
engine installed and is therefore not available
in all vehicles. Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
Digital speedometer shows navigation instructions.
You can find further information on navigation in
the separate multimedia system operating
instructions.
X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-
rate operating instructions).
wheel to select the Navi menu.
wheel to select the Trip menu. Route guidance not active
digital speedometer ;.
A gear shift recommendation : Z can also
follow.
Observe the information on gearshift recom-
mendation : when shifting manually
(Y page 135).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recom-
: Direction of travel
mendation is shown in the status bar of the
; Current road
Route guidance active = Lanes not recommended

? Recommended lane and new lane during a
No change of direction announced change of direction
A Change-of-direction symbol

On multilane roads, new lane recommendations
can be displayed for the next change of direction
if the digital map supports this data. During the
change of direction, new lanes may be added.
Lane not recommended =: you will not be able
to complete the next change of direction if you
: Distance to destination stay in this lane.
; Distance to the next change of direction Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction ?: in this lane you will be
= Current road
able to complete the next two changes of direc-
? "Follow the road's course" symbol tion without changing lane.
Change of direction without lane recom-
mendation Other status indicators of the naviga-
tion system
: Road into which the change of direction

leads The navigation system displays additional infor-
; Distance to change of direction and visual mation and the vehicle status.
distance display Possible displays:
= Change-of-direction symbol
RNew Route... or Calculating Route
When a change of direction is to be made, you A new route is calculated.
will see symbol = for the change of direction
RRoad Not Mapped
and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator
shortens towards the top of the display as you The vehicle position is inside the area of the
approach the point of the announced change of digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.
direction. The change of direction starts once newly built streets, car parks or private land.
the distance display reaches zero. RNo Route
No route could be calculated to the selected
Change of direction announced with a destination.
lane recommendation RO
You have reached the destination or an inter-
mediate destination.
: Road into which the change of direction

leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
Z
Audio menu Audio data from various audio devices or media

can be played, depending on the equipment
Selecting a radio station installed in the vehicle.
X Switch on the multimedia system and then
audio CD or MP3 mode (see the separate

operating instructions).
wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous track: briefly
press the 9 or : button.
X To select a track from the track list (rapid
: Active station list scrolling): press and hold the 9 or :
; Station frequency with memory position button until desired track appears.
The multifunction display shows station ; with If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid
station frequency or station name. The preset scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio
position is only displayed along with station ; if drives or data carriers support this function.
this has been stored.
If track information is stored on the audio device
X Switch on the multimedia system and select or medium, the multifunction display will show
Radio (see the separate operating instruc- the number and title of the track.
tions).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering Video DVD operation
wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select a preset list or station list: press
and briefly hold the 9 or : button until
the preset list or station list in the desired
frequency range is shown.
X To select a station: briefly press 9
or :.
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio. You can only operate DVD videos in the Audio
menu in vehicles with COMAND.
You can find further information on operation
in the "Satellite radio" section of the separate X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD
multimedia system operating instructions. (see the separate operating instructions).
Operating an audio player or audio wheel to select the Audio menu.
media X To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene :
appears.
Telephone menu
: Current title
Introduction
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from Selecting an entry in the phone book
traffic conditions. You could also lose control X Press the = or ; button on the steering
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. wheel to select the Tel menu.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic X Press the 9, : or a button to

situation permits. If you are not sure that this switch to the phone book.
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention X Authorize access to the phone book on the
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- phone.
ment when the vehicle is stationary. X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal or
requirements for the country in which you are X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the
currently driving. 9 or : button for longer than one sec-
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu- ond.
facturer’s operating instructions). Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa- button or reach the end of the list.
rate operating instructions). X If only one telephone number is stored for
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the mul- a name: press the 6 or a button to
timedia system; see the separate operating start dialing.
instructions. or
X Press the = or ; button on the steering X If there is more than one number for a
wheel to select the Tel menu. particular name:press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
You will see one of the following display mes-
sages in the multifunction display: X Press the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
RTelephone READY or the name of the net- X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
work provider: the mobile phone has found a
network and is ready to receive. or
RTelephone No service: there is no network X If you do not want to make a call: press the
available or the mobile phone is searching for ~ or % button.
a network.
Redialing
Accepting a call
The on-board computer saves the last names or
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel numbers dialed in the redial memory.
menu, a display message appears in the multi- X Press the = or ; button on the steering
function display. wheel to select the Tel menu.
You can accept a call at any time, even if you are X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
not in the Tel menu. memory.
X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel X Press the 9 or : button to select the
to accept an incoming call. desired name or number.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
Rejecting or ending a call or
You can end or reject a call anytime, even if you X If you do not want to make the call: press
are not in the Tel menu. the ~ or % button.
X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
to reject or end a call.
Z
Assistance menu Deactivating/activating ESP®

Introduction Observe the important safety notes on ESP®
(Y page 63).
vehicle, you have the following options in the G WARNING

DriveAssist menu: If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
RDisplaying the assistance graphic bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
(Y page 182) of skidding and an accident.
RDeactivating/activating ESP® (except
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) (Y page 182) Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
RActivating/deactivating Active Brake Assist
bed in the following.
(Y page 182)
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
ing situations:
(Y page 183)
Rwhen using snow chains
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 183) Rin deep snow
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Ron sand or gravel
(Y page 183) Deactivating/activating ESP® in Mercedes-
AMG vehicles (Y page 65).
Displaying the assistance graphic For further information about ESP®, see
(Y page 63).
X Start the engine.
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select ESP.
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again.
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
X Press 9 or : to select Assistance
in the instrument cluster lights up continu-
Graphic. ously when the engine is running.
The multifunction display shows the distance If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up
display of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the continuously, ESP® is not available due to a mal-
assistance graphic. function.
The assistance graphic displays the status of Observe the information on warning lamps
and information from the following driving (Y page 219).
systems or driving safety systems: Observe the information on display messages
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 150) (Y page 189).
RActive Brake Assist (Y page 61)
RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 169)
Activating or deactivating Active Brake
RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 172)
Assist
X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST X Press the = or ; button on the steering
assessment. wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
Brake Assist.
X Press a to confirm. X Press a to confirm.

The current selection appears. The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but- X Press a again to confirm.
ton again. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,

When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the Standard or Adaptive.
æ symbol appears in the multifunction dis- X Press the a button to save the setting.
play in the assistance graphic display. When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the
Further information on Active Brake Assist multifunction display shows the lane mark-
(Y page 61). ings as bright lines in the assistance graphic.
For further information about Lane Keeping
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION Assist, see (Y page 172).
ASSIST
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Service menu
X Press the 9 or : button to select Depending on the equipment installed in the
Attention Assist. vehicle, you have the following options in the
X Press a to confirm. Serv. menu:
The current selection appears. RCalling up display messages in message
X Press a to confirm. memory (Y page 188)
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-
Standard or Sensitive. tem (Canada only) (Y page 289)
X Press the a button to save the setting. RChecking the tire pressure electronically
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the (USA only) (Y page 289)
é symbol appears in the multifunction dis- RCalling up the service due date
play in the assistance graphics display. (Y page 258)
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (Y page 169).
Settings menu
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Introduction
Assist
X Press the = or ; button on the steering vehicle, you have the following options in the
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Sett. menu:
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
Blind Spot Assist.
RChanging the light settings
RChanging the vehicle settings
The current selection appears.
RChanging the convenience settings
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again. RRestoring the factory settings
For further information about Blind Spot Assist,

see (Y page 171). Instrument cluster
Selecting the distance unit
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-
tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-
X Press the = or ; button on the steering plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. tifunction display.
Lane Keeping Assist.
Z
X Press the = or ; button on the steering X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu. wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster submenu. Instrument Cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm. X Press a to confirm.

X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function. Permanent Display: function.
You will see the selected setting: km or miles. The current setting Outside Temperature
X Press the a button to save the setting. or Speedometer [km/h]/Speedometer
[mph] appears.
The selected unit of measurement for distance
X Press the a button to save the setting.
applies to:
RDigitalspeedometer in the Trip menu
ROdometer and the trip odometer
Lights
RTrip computer
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
RCurrent fuel consumption and approximate off
range
This function is not available in Canada.
RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu
RCruise control
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RASSYST PLUS service interval display Light submenu.
Switching the additional speedometer X Press a to confirm.
on/off X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Daytime Running Lights function.
If the additional speedometer is switched on,
If the Daytime Running Lights function has
the speed is shown in the status area of the
been switched on, the multifunction display
multifunction display instead of the outside tem-
shows the cone of light and the W symbol
perature.
in orange.
The speed display is inverse to the speedome- X Press the a button to save the setting.
ter.
Further information on daytime running lamps
wheel to select the Sett. menu. (Y page 99).
Instrument Cluster submenu. Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking mechanism
Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer
[mph] function. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
You will see the selected setting: On or Off. wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
Selecting permanent display X Press a to confirm.
The Permanent Display: function allows you X Press the : or 9 button to select the
to choose whether the multifunction display Automatic Door Lock function.
always shows the outside temperature or the If the Automatic Door Lock function is
speed. switched on, the multifunction display shows
The speed display is inverse to the speedome- the doors in orange.
ter. X Press the a button to save the setting.
If you activate the Automatic door locks
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a
speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).
For further information on the automatic locking Restoring the factory settings
feature, see (Y page 76).
Activating/deactivating the acoustic wheel to select the Sett. menu.
locking verification signal X Press the : or 9 button to select the

If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an Factory Setting submenu.
acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi- X Press a to confirm.
cle. The Reset All Settings? function
X Press the = or ; button on the steering appears.
wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Yes.
Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to confirm the selec-
X Press a to confirm. tion.
If you have selected Yes, the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message.
Acoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
the multifunction display shows the & Lights function in the Light submenu is only
symbol in orange. reset if the vehicle is stationary.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Convenience
Warm-up
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-
ing feature on/off
This function is only available in Canada.
This function is only available when the vehicle is
equipped with the electrical fold-in function.
When you activate the Auto. Mirror Folding
function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when
the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicle
and then open the driver's or front-passenger : Digital speedometer
door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. ; Gear indicator
If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror = Upshift indicator
Folding function and you fold in the exterior ? Engine oil temperature
mirrors using the button on the door A Coolant temperature
(Y page 96), they will not fold out automatically.
The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out
B Transmission fluid temperature
using the button on the door. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
wheel to select the Sett. menu. Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP =
indicates that the engine has reached the
overrevving range when in the manual drive
Convenience submenu.
program.
Engine and transmission oil temperature:
X Press the : or 9 button to select the when the engine and transmission are at nor-
Auto. Mirror Folding function. mal operating temperature, oil tempera-
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is ture ? and B are displayed in white in the
switched on, the multifunction display shows multifunction display.
the exterior mirror in orange. If the multifunction display shows oil temper-
X Press the a button to save the setting. ature ? or B in blue, the engine or the
transmission are not yet at normal operating
Z
temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out- You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is
put during this time. running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
SETUP X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
select the AMG menu.

X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACETIMER appears.
X To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time
: Drive Comfort/Sport/Sport +
; Chassis Comfort/Sport/Sport +
= Transmission D/M
? ESP® On/Off or SPORT handling mode
Sport
SETUP displays the following information and
functions: X Press the = or ; button to select
Rthe digital speedometer Interm. Time.
Rthe gear indicator X Press a to confirm.
Rthe drive system setting The intermediate time appears for five sec-
Rthe suspension mode onds.
Rthe transmission position
Starting a new lap
Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) status
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
select the AMG menu.
X Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears.
RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER
: RACETIMER
; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap
X Press a to confirm New Lap.
i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen
laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with
Finish Lap.
: Lap
Stopping the RACETIMER
; RACETIMER
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
X Press the % button on the steering wheel. = Average speed

X Confirm Yes with a. ? Distance covered
The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the A Maximum speed
vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in This function is shown if you have stored at least

the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position 3 one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
and then press a to confirm Start, timing is
continued.
wheel to select the AMG menu.
Resetting the current lap X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
X Stop the RACETIMER. overall evaluation appears.
X Press the = or ; button to select
Reset Lap. Lap statistics
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
: Lap
; Lap time
= Average lap speed
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is ? Lap length
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are A Top speed during lap
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you This function is only available if you have stored
have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-
have to be reset. TIMER.
X Reset the current lap. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press a to confirm Reset.
X Press 9 repeatedly until a lap evaluation
Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multi-
function display. appears.
Each lap appears in a separate submenu. The
X Press the : button to select Yes and press
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.
the a button to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a dif-
All laps are deleted.
ferent lap evaluation.
Overall statistics
: RACETIMER overall evaluation

; Total time driven
Z
188 Display messages
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.

Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority
display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the
corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 156)
RParking (Y page 140)
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display
messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up
the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Display messages 189
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist), ESP® (Electronic
Stability Program), the HOLD function and hill start assist are tempo-
Currently Unavaila‐ rarily unavailable.
ble See Operator's Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
Manual
In addition, the !, ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road, making
slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!÷ ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not avail-
able due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
Operator's Manual
The !, ÷, å and $ (USA only) or J (Canada only)
warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
Z
÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
unavailable.
Currently Unavaila‐ Active Brake Assist may have also failed.

ble See Operator's
Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due
to a malfunction.
Currently Unavaila‐ Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
ble See Operator's
Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the
instrument cluster.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLD
function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.
÷

Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
Inoperative See A warning tone sounds.
Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps may light up in
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock
if you brake hard, for example.
F(USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition
only) was switched off.
Turn On the Igni‐ X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
tion to Release the X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.
Parking Brake
F(USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the
only)!(Canada electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 141).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
Please Release Park‐ X Release the electric parking brake manually.
ing Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 141).
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only)!(Canada To apply:
only) X Switch the ignition off.
Parking Brake See X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
Operator's Manual
X Shift the transmission to position P.
Z

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.

To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 141).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Do not drive on.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
To release:
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-
tinues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 302).
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds

after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 141).
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply
the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the selector lever to P, as the electric parking brake is not
applied automatically.
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
only)!(Canada after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
only) goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
Parking Brake Inop‐
voltage or undervoltage.
erative
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:
Z

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.

$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
A warning tone sounds. The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only)
only)J(Canada warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
only) G WARNING
Check Brake Fluid
Level The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Check Brake Pad Wear
G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.

Inoperative
Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Functions Currently Possible causes are:
Limited See Opera‐
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
tor's Manual
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range
Rthe on-board voltage is too low
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Restart the engine.
Active Brake Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. Situation-

Assist: System Inop‐ dependent parking assistance may also have failed.
erative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Radar Sensors Dirty The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are:

ual
RDirt on sensors
RHeavy rain or snow
RWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning
or is temporarily unavailable:
RActive Brake Assist
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC
A warning tone also sounds.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and
drive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis-
appears.
X Clean all sensors (Y page 262).
The display message disappears.
6 The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also

lights up in the instrument cluster.
SRS Malfunction Ser‐
vice Required G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 39).
6 The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or right.

The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Service G WARNING
Required or Front The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
Z
6 The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning.

Rear Left Malfunc‐

tion Service G WARNING
Required or Rear The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
6 The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.

Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction G WARNING
Service Required or The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-
Right Side Curtain tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Airbag Malfunction There is an increased risk of injury.
Service Required

Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deac-
bag Disabled See tivated during the journey, although:

Operator's Manual Ran adult
or
Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may
not be triggered in the event of an accident.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-
passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag
(Y page 47)
RThe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger¶Airbag Disabled¶See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the mul-
tifunction display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-
pant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 47).
Z

Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled
bag Enabled See during the journey, even though:
Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on
the seat.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag may
be triggered unintentionally.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-
pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS has deactivated the front-passenger front air bag and front-
passenger knee bag (Y page 47)
RThe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the mul-
tifunction display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-
pant.

If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.

For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 47).
Lights
i Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:
The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp
have failed.
b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left Corner‐ (Y page 103).
ing Light or Check
Right Cornering or
Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

Check Left Low Beam (Y page 103).
or Check Right Low
Beam or
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Rear Left (Y page 103).
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Front Left (Y page 103).
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defec-

tive.
Check Left Mirror X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Turn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal
b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

Check Center Brake
Lamp
Z
b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Brake (Y page 103).

LamporCheck Right
Brake Lamp or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail and (Y page 103).
Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail or
and Brake Lamps X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

Check Left High (Y page 103).
Beam or Check Right
High Beam or
b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.

License Plate Lamp
b The rear fog lamp is faulty.

Rear Fog Lamp (Y page 103).
or
b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.

Check Front Left (Y page 103).
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right or
Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The backup lamp is defective.

Backup Light (Y page 103).
or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
Lamp or Check Right
Tail Lamp
b The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.


Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.

Check Rear Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Rear Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

Check Left Daytime (Y page 103).
Running Light or
Check Right Daytime or
Running Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The active light function is faulty.

Active Headlamps
Inoperative
b The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
b The light sensor is defective.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning
tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
b You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.

X Turn the light switch to the L or Ã position.
Switch On Headlamps
Z

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Assist Currently Possible causes are:
Unavailable See
Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty
Operator's Manual
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine
+ The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant Level ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
See Operator's Man‐ cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
ual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 257).
If you have to add coolant frequently:
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling
system checked.
? The fan motor is malfunctioning.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
? The coolant is too hot.


Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which
can occur just by opening the hood.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and
the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.
If the temperature increases again:

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
# The battery is not being charged.

See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are:
ual
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.

Z
# The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is
too low.
Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds.

Operator's Manual
X Observe the instructions in the display message # See Oper‐
ator's Manual.
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check Engine Oil At
Next Refueling ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
erwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 255).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 256).
If the engine oil needs topping up more often:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
ç There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
æ The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
Gas Cap Loose
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
Driving systems

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or
a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also
Attention Assist: sounds.
Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Attention Assist
Inoperative
ë The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.

Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 156).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 156).
Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:
ble See Operator's
Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty
Manual
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.
X Clean the windshield.
Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:
ble See Operator's

Manual
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is faulty.

Inoperative The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
Parking Pilot Can‐ The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fas-
celed tened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while

steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-
tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Parking Pilot again later (Y page 162).
Parking Pilot Inop‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneu-
erative vers.
Parking Pilot will become available again after approximately ten
minutes (Y page 162).
X Switch off and restart the engine.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.


Parking Pilot Fin‐ The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
ished The display message disappears automatically.

Distance Pilot Off Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated (Y page 150).
If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
Distance Pilot Now Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been tem-
Available porarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC (Y page 150).
Distance Pilot Cur‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.
rently Unavailable Possible causes are:
See Operator's Man‐
ual
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range
Rthe on-board voltage is too low
disappears.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again.
Distance Pilot Inop‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Situation-dependent

erative parking assistance may also have failed.
Distance Pilot Sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
pended is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Distance Pilot A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met.
- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
(Y page 150).
Z

Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning.
erative A warning tone also sounds.
Cruise Control RA condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for exam-
ple.
RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store
the speed.
or
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 148).
or
X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 182).
Tires

Check Tire Pressure Canada only:
Soon The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss
in pressure.
Possible causes:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed
new wheels and tires
Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped
G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 266).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-
sure is correct (Y page 289).
Check Tire Pressure Canada only:

Then Restart Run The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message
Flat Indicator and has not been restarted since.
X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 289).
Run Flat Indicator Canada only:

Inoperative The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Please Correct Tire USA only:

Pressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 289).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 291).
Z

Check Tires USA only:
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The
wheel position appears in the multifunction display.

G WARNING
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired
tire (Y page 266).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 289).
Warning Tire Mal‐ USA only:

function The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel
position appears in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire
tire (Y page 266).
Tire Press. Monitor USA only:

Currently Unavaila‐ Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no
ble signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure
monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sen‐ USA only:
sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several

wheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
Tire Pressure Moni‐ USA only:

tor Inoperative No The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The
Wheel Sensors tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for
a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor USA only:

Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
Vehicle
Depress Brake to You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-
Start Engine tion N without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
To Deselect P or N, You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or D with-

Depress Brake and out starting the engine.
Start Engine X Start the engine.
i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the

desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can the
parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the brake pedal,
the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock
remains engaged.
i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †) you can
only shift out of position P into another transmission position when
the engine is running.
Apply Brake to You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R, N or D
Shift from 'P' without depressing the brake pedal.
Z

Transmission Not in The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in
P Risk of Vehicle position R, N or D.
Rolling Away A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
X Close the driver's door completely.
Service Required Do You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer
If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-
mission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving.

when Vehicle is Sta‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
tionary attention to road and traffic conditions.
To Engage Trans‐ You have attempted to shift from position D or N to transmission

miss. Position R position R.
First Depress the X Shift the transmission to position R while depressing the brake
Brake pedal.
Reversing Not Possi‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot back up.
ble Service Required X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.

function X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.

function Stop X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

Stop Vehicle Shift The automatic transmission has overheated.
to P Leave Engine X Drive on carefully.

Running The automatic transmission is available again when the display
message goes out.
X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the dis-
play message has disappeared.
Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being
Malfunction charged.
X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch off
the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Trans. Oil Overhea‐ Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated.
ted Drive on with Manual drive program M and the temporarily active manual drive pro-
Care gram are no longer available. The engine power output is reduced.
X Allow the vehicle to cool down.
4matic Currently 4MATIC has overheated. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels.
Unavailable X Drive on.
The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly.
When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available again and
the vehicle is driven by all four wheels.
4matic Inoperative 4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the front
wheels.
N The trunk lid is open.

X Close the trunk lid.
M The hood is open.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
Z
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.
Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.

Power Steering Mal‐
function See Opera‐ G WARNING
tor's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:

If you are unable to steer safely:
X Do not drive on.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver

range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
in the multifunction display.
¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 257).
Wiper Malfunction‐ The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.

ing X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty.

Flashers Malfunc‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tioning
SmartKey
Â You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not Belong
to Vehicle
Â The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

A warning tone sounds
Take Your Key from
X Remove the SmartKey.
Ignition
Â The SmartKey needs to be replaced.


Obtain a New Key
Â The SmartKey battery is discharged.

X Change the battery (Y page 72).
Replace Key Battery
Â The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and is

only a reminder.
Don't Forget Your You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. The
Key SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. A warning tone sounds.
X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Â The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.

Key Not Detected If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
(red display message) trally or start the engine.
X Locate the SmartKey.
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the

SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey
mode.
Â The SmartKey is currently undetected.

X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
Key Not Detected
(white display message) If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â The SmartKey is continually undetected.

The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is
Remove 'Start' But‐ faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
ton and Insert Key
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
Z
216 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator
and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.
These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting
the engine or whilst driving.
Safety
Seat belts
Warning/ N Signal type
indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43).
ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
The warning tone ceases.
ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 217
Safety systems

lamp
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
Z

lamp
! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. BAS (Brake
Assist), Active Brake Assist, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), the HOLD func-
tion and hill start assist are also deactivated, for example.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, EBD (Electronic
Brake-force Distribution), the HOLD function and hill start assist are also deacti-
vated, for example.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:

lamp

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone
also sounds.
EBD is malfunctioning. ABS, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, the HOLD function
and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable.
G WARNING
ple.
! N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp and
÷å the yellow ABS, ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is
$J running.
ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. BAS, Active Brake Assist, EBD, the HOLD func-
tion and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable.
G WARNING
ple.
Z

lamp
÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at
least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 65) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 63).
å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a
wheel starts to spin.
G WARNING
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted.
X Reactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 65) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 63).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.
M N Mercedes-AMG vehicles only:

The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-
bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP®" section (Y page 65).

lamp

÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not
available due to a malfunction.
G WARNING
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.
Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNING
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
Z

lamp
!F N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or lights up and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake lights up.
6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 39).
Engine
lamp
; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency
mode.
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as

soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal
requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal
regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
æ N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

lamp

æ N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Z

lamp
? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 257).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡
(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning
tone also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine
radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 257).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.

lamp
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified

specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
lamp
· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning
tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too
high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist
(Y page 61).
Z
Tires
lamp
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.
G WARNING
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-
tion.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(Y page 266).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 289).
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)

flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
Function restrictions 227
General notes Please always use this feature instead of con-

sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
The multimedia system section in this Opera-
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
tor's Manual describes the basic principles for
risk of an accident.
operation. More information can be found in the
Digital Operator's Manual. This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that is deemed to comply without maximum
G WARNING permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-
If you operate information systems and com- ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance
of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- radiation source and a person's body (not
Multimedia system
cle while driving, you will be distracted from including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and
traffic conditions. You could also lose control legs).
G WARNING
situation permits. If you are not sure that this Modifications to electronic components, their
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention software as well as wiring can impair their
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- function and/or the function of other net-
ment when the vehicle is stationary. worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
You must observe the legal requirements for the result, these may no longer function as inten-
country in which you are currently driving when ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
operating the multimedia system. the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
The multimedia system calculates the route to accident and injury.
the destination without taking the following into Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
account, for example:
tronic components or their software. You
Rtraffic lights should have all work to electrical and elec-
Rstop and yield signs tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
Rparking or stopping restrictions specialist workshop.
Rroad narrowing
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav- tronics, the general operating permit is ren-
igation recommendations if the actual street/ dered invalid.
traffic situation does not correspond with the
digital map's data.
For example: Function restrictions
Ra diverted route
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way
ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
street has been changed You will notice this, for example, because either
For this reason, you must always observe road you will not be able to select certain menu items
and traffic rules and regulations during your or a message will appear to this effect.
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Z
228 Operating system
Operating system the media source or set the volume, the sound
is automatically switched on.
Overview i Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
General notes
! Do not use the space in front of the display Functions
for storage. Objects placed here could dam- The multimedia system has the following func-
age the display or impair its function. Avoid tions:
any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result in RRadio mode
impairments to the display, which could be RMedia mode with media search
irreversible. RSound systems
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your RNavigation system
ability to read the display. COMAND: navigation via the hard drive
Multimedia system
The display has an automatic temperature-con- Audio 20: navigation via SD card
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is RCommunication functions
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may temporarily switch off RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
completely. RVehicle functions with system settings
RFavorites functions
Cleaning instructions
Controller
! Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a The controller in the center console lets you:
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the Rselect menu items on the display
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
Renter characters
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
Rselect a destination on the map
The display must be switched off and have
Rsave entries
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when The controller can be:
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam- Rturned 3
age to the display.
Rslid left or right 1
Rslid forwards or back 4
Switching the multimedia system
Rslid diagonally 2
on/off
Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7
X Press the q control knob.
Back button
Adjusting the volume
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
X Turn the q control knob. call up the basic display of the current operating
The volume is adjusted: mode.
X To exit the menu: briefly press the %
Rfor the currently selected media source
button.
Rduring traffic or navigation announcements
The multimedia system changes to the next
Rin hands-free mode during a phone call higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
Switching the sound on or off X To call up the basic display: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
X Press the 8 button on the control panel. The multimedia system changes to the basic
If the audio output is switched off, the status display of the current operating mode.
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
Operating system 229
Favorites Navigation mode

Calling up and exiting favorites Important safety notes
X To call up: press the g button on the con- G WARNING
troller.
If you operate information systems and com-
X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.
The favorites are displayed. munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
X To exit: press the g button again.
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
Adding favorites
Adding a predefined favorite situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
Multimedia system
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the

country in which you are currently driving when
operating the navigation system.
General notes
Among other things, correct functioning of the
navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
: Adds a new favorite certain situations, GPS reception may be
; Renames a selected favorite impaired, there may be interference or there
= Moves a selected favorite may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
? Deletes a selected favorite parking garages.
Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT
X Press the g button. (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
X Slide 6 the controller. The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions
The menu bar is shown. are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD
X Select Reassign. card box contains a quick guide.
The categories are displayed. The following descriptions apply to navigation
X Select a category. with COMAND. Further information can be
The favorites are displayed. found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
X Select a favorite.
X Add a favorite at the desired position. Selecting a route type and route options
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten. Multimedia system:
X Select NaviQNavigation.
Adding your own favorite The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X Select VehicleQClimate Control. X Slide 6 the controller.
X Press and hold the g button until the X Select OptionsQRoute Settings.
favorites are displayed. Notes for route types:
X Add a favorite at the desired position.
REco Route
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten. RDynamic Traffic Route
Traffic reports on the route for the route guid-
ance are taken into account (not available in
all countries).
Z
RDynamic TRF. Route After Request the corresponding digits are displayed with an
You can decide whether or not current traffic X.
reports should be included in the route cal- X Enter the street and house number.
culation (not available in all countries). The address is in the menu.
RCalculate Alternative Routes Further options for destination entry:
Different routes are being calculated. In order Rsearch for a keyword
to do so, instead of Start, select the menu
item Continue. The keyword search finds destinations using
fragments of words.
X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
Rselect the last destination
Options.
Rselect a contact
X Select a route option.
Rselect a POI
Notes for route options:
You can search for a POI by location, name or
RUse Toll Roads telephone number.
Multimedia system
The route calculation includes roads which Rselect destination on the map
require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
Renter intermediate destination
RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle:
(only available in the USA) You can map the route to the destination
yourself with up to four intermediate destina-
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access tions.
conditions for carpool lanes.
Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool Apps
lanes option is activated.
Rselect geo-coordinates
Entering an address
Calculating the route
Multimedia system:
Prerequisite: the address has been entered and
X Select NaviQNavigation. is in the menu.
The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Select Start or Continue.
X Slide 6 the controller. The route is calculated with the selected route
X Select DestinationQAddress Entry. type and the selected route options.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows: If route guidance has already been activated,
Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to end the current route guidance.
Rstate/province, city or ZIP code
X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or
Rcity or ZIP code, center
Set as Intermediate Destination.
Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels
X Select City. the current route guidance and starts route
The city in which the vehicle is currently loca- calculation to the new destination.
ted (current vehicle position) is at the top. Set as Intermediate Destination adds
Below this, you will see locations for which the new destination in addition to the existing
route guidance has already been carried out. destination and opens the intermediate des-
X Enter the city. tinations list.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X To switch to the list: slide the 5 control- Connecting a mobile phone
ler.
X Select the location. Prerequisites
If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are
different ZIP codes available for the location, For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you
require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile
1.0 or above.
Operating system 231
Multimedia system: Only one mobile phone can be connected to the

X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐ multimedia system at any one time.
tingsQActivate Bluetooth. Searching for a mobile phone
X Activate Bluetooth® O. Multimedia system:
Mobile phone: X Select Tel/®QConnect
DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart
X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue- Search.
tooth® visibility for other devices (see the The available mobile phones are displayed.
manufacturer's operating instructions). Symbols in the device list
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man-
ufacturer's products might be identical. To Sym- Explanation
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile bol
phone, change the device name (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions). Ï New mobile phone found, not yet
authorized.
Multimedia system
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is
Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow- not connected
ing information will be transmitted after you # Mobile phone is authorized and
connect: connected
RPhone book
RCall lists Connecting a mobile phone
RText messages and e-mail
Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
i Further information on suitable mobile X Select mobile phone.
phones can be found at: http:// A code is displayed in the multimedia system
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect and on the mobile phone.
i In the USA, you can get in touch with the X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center system.
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
Searching for and authorizing (connect- prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-
ing) a mobile phone er's operating instructions).
Before using your mobile phone with the multi- X If the codes are different: select No on the
media system for the first time, you will need to multimedia system.
search for the phone and then authorize (con- The process is canceled.
nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author- Repeat authorization.
ization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode):
multimedia system automatically makes the X Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobile
procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone phone.
available. The mobile phone is always connec- The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
ted automatically after authorization. Further X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-
information on using a mobile phone with the nation as a passkey.
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.
Manual).
X Press ¬ to confirm.
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
security settings on your mobile phone (see the phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
manufacturer's operating instructions). confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
Z
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® Inserting/removing an SD card
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
to two minutes to be displayed (see the man- Important safety notes
ufacturer's operating instructions).
G WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
Switching between mobile phones
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
If you have authorized more than one mobile increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
phone, you can switch between the individual Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
phones.
If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-
Multimedia system: tion immediately.
X Select Connect Device.
X Select a mobile phone from the device list. ! If you are no longer using the SD card, you
should remove it and store it outside the vehi-
Multimedia system
cle. High temperatures can damage the card.

Media mode Inserting an SD card
General notes The SD card slot is on the control panel.
X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
If you wish to play external media sources, the the SD card engages. The side with the con-
default display must already be turned on. Fur- tacts must face downwards.
ther information on media mode (see the Digital
Operator's Manual). Removing an SD card
The following external media sources can be X Press the SD card.
used: The SD card is ejected.
RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®) X Remove the SD card.
RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
(Y page 232) Connecting USB devices
RCD
RDVD (COMAND)
RSD cards
Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth®
i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD

changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Using the device list

Multimedia system:
X Select MediaQDevices.
The available media sources will be shown. There are two USB ports in the stowage space
The # dot indicates the current setting. under the armrest.
X Select the media source. X Connect the USB device to the USB port.
Playable files are played. X Select the media source (Y page 232).
Stowage areas 233
Loading guidelines tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's

door.
RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry
G WARNING objects.
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip sible and as low down in the trunk as possible.
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle RThe load must not protrude above the upper
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- edge of the seat backrests.
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- RAlways place the load against the rear or front
den change in direction. seat backrests. Make sure that the seat
backrests are securely locked into place.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
seats if possible.
loads against slipping or tipping before the
RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel
journey. nets to transport loads and luggage.
Stowage and features

RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening mate-
G WARNING rials appropriate for the weight and size of the
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust load.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for
trunk lid is open when the engine is running, protection.
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Stowage areas
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid Stowage spaces
open.
G WARNING
G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
If objects in the passenger compartment are
become very hot. If you come into contact
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces
Always be particularly careful around the and mobile phone brackets cannot always
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow retain all objects they contain. There is a risk
these components to cool down before touch- of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
ing them. braking or a sudden change in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle
are dependent on the distribution of the load thrown around in such situations.
within the vehicle. RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
Observe the following notes on loading and trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
transporting a load: stowage nets.
RNever exceed the maximum permissible RClose the lockable stowage spaces before
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight starting a journey.
rating for the vehicle (including occupants).
The values are specified on the vehicle iden- RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
the trunk.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 233).

Z
234 Stowage areas
Stowage compartments in the front Stowage compartment in the front center

console
Glove box
X To open: press the marking on cover :.

To open: pull handle : and open glove box
X
i Depending on the vehicle equipment, there
flap ;. may be an ashtray in the center console
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until instead of a storage compartment.
it engages.
Stowage compartment in front of the arm-
There is a pen holder at the top of the glove box
flap. rest (vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion)
Eyeglasses compartment
X To open: press the marking on cover :.

X To open: press marking :.
i You can remove the non-slip mat and the
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is insert for cleaning. When removing the insert
always closed while the vehicle is in motion. you will have to overcome some slight resist-
ance.
Stowage areas 235
Stowage compartment under the armrest
X To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ;

forwards.
X To open: on vehicles with movable armrests,
make sure that the armrest is in the rearmost
position. Stowage space in the rear

X Press button : and fold the armrest up.
Stowage compartment in the rear center
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the arm-
rest can be moved backwards or forwards in a console
longitudinal direction.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-
lowing may be in the stowage compartment: a
multimedia connector unit with an SD card slot
and 2 USB ports, e.g. for use with an iPod®,
iPhone® or MP3 player; see the separate oper-
ating instructions.
Stowage compartment under the driver's
seat and front-passenger seat
G WARNING
If you exceed the maximum load for the stow- X To open: pull down the top of stowage com-
age compartment, the cover may not be able partment : by the edge of the handle.
to restrain the items. Items may be thrown out
of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- there may be an open stowage space above
the stowage compartment.
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction.
Never exceed the maximum permissible load Parcel nets
for the stowage compartment. Stow and
secure heavy objects in the trunk. Stowage nets are located:
Rin the front-passenger footwell
The maximum permissible load of the stowage Ron the back of the driver's and the front-
compartment is 2.6 lbs (1.2 kg). passenger seat
Ron the left and right-hand side in the trunk
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 233)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 233).
Z
236 Stowage areas
Through-loading facility in the rear RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be

pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be
restrained by the seat backrest.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
X To open: fold down seat armrest :.
X Pull the center head restraint on the rear ! Before folding the backrest in the rear com-
bench seat into the uppermost position partment forwards, make sure that the rear
(Y page 91). compartment armrest and the cupholder are
folded in. They may otherwise be damaged.
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests
can be folded forwards separately to increase
the trunk capacity.
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

and back
Folding the rear seat backrests forward
X Slide locking mechanism = in the direction

of the arrow.
X Swing flap ; fully to the side.
Flap ; is held open by a magnet.
X To close: swing flap ; in the trunk back until
it engages.
X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary.
X Fully insert the backrest head restraints if

Cargo compartment enlargement necessary (Y page 92).
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
Important safety notes forward if necessary.
X Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle ;
G WARNING
of the seat backrest forwards.
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat Corresponding seat backrest : is released.
backrest are not engaged they could fold for- X Fold backrest : forwards.
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
event of an accident. back if necessary.
Stowage areas 237
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a

load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip
protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or
corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
X Insert the seat belt into seat-belt holder :.
Folding the rear seat backrest back

! Make sure that the seat belt does not

become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged. : Cargo tie-down rings
Stowage well under the trunk floor

forward if necessary.
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visi-
Under the trunk floor you can find a bracket for
ble.
TIREFIT and the vehicle tool kit, etc.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 92). X To open: pull handle : up.

back if necessary.
Securing loads
Observe the following notes on securing loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 233).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
X Hook handle : into rain trough ;.
Z
238 Features
To enlarge the trunk you can remove the trunk You will find information on the maximum roof
floor. load in the "Technical data" section
X To remove: lift the trunk floor almost to rain
(Y page 314).
trough ; and pull it out. An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load
may become detached from the vehicle. You
must therefore ensure that you observe the roof
carrier manufacturer's installation instructions.
Attaching the roof carrier

X To insert: place the trunk floor at the bottom

in the center.
X Hold sides of trunk floor = and press in the
direction of the arrow until it engages in
hooks ?.
X Open and fold the covers : upwards care-
fully in the direction of the arrow.
Roof carrier X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage
points under covers :.
Important safety notes X Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
G WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving character- Features
istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
load, the driving characteristics, as well as Cup holder
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and G WARNING
adjust your driving style. The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only traveling, the container may be flung around
use roof carriers that have been tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu-
helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. pants may come into contact with the liquid
Position the load on the roof rack in such a and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage be distracted from the traffic conditions and
even when it is in motion. you could lose control of the vehicle. There is
Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure a risk of an accident and injury.
that when the roof carrier is installed you can: Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/ stationary. Only use the cup holder for con-
sliding panel fully tainers of the right size. Always close the con-
Ropen the trunk lid fully tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.
Features 239
G WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces
and mobile phone brackets cannot always
retain all objects they contain. There is a risk
of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations. The cup holder and the rubber mat underneath
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- can be removed for cleaning. Clean them with
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or clean, lukewarm water only.
stowage nets. X To remove: carefully pull in upper sections of

RClose the lockable stowage spaces before cup holder : on the driver's and front-
passenger sides until they release.
starting a journey.
X Lift the cup holder upwards ; until it can be
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
removed.
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
the trunk.
! Only use the cup holders for containers of

the right size and which have lids. The drinks
could otherwise spill.
The stowage compartments in the doors provide
space for bottles:
Rfront: capacity up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l)
Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l)
Cup holder in the front center console X To install: insert cup holder into lateral
curved sections ; in the stowage compart-
ment. Insert the cup holder so that the wedge
of the upper section of cup holder : faces
forwards.
X Press the cup holder downwards until it
engages on the right and left-hand sides.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
: Cup holder ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear
seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder
could be damaged.
Z
240 Features
Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is
clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has
been folded up.
Glare from the side

X Fold down the sun visor.
X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.

X To open: press the front of cup holder : Ashtray
or ;.
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically. Front ashtray
X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until

! The stowage space under the ashtray is not
it engages. heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in
the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is
properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage
Sun visors space could be damaged.
Overview
G WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
X Vehicles with a stowage compartment

cover: press the lower section of cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ; and
out.
X To re-install the insert: press insert = into
the holder until it engages.
i If you remove the ashtray insert, you can use
the resulting compartment for stowage.
: Mirror light
; Bracket
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
? Vanity mirror
A Mirror cover
Features 241
Rear compartment ashtray

lock (Y page 121).
X To open: pull cover = out by its top edge. X Vehicles with a stowage compartment
X To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in the cover: press the lower section of cover :.

direction of arrow ? until it audibly releases. The stowage compartment opens.
X Lift insert ; up and out. X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
X To install the insert: install insert ; from Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
above into the holder and press down until it when the heating element is red-hot.
engages.
12 V sockets
Cigarette lighter
General notes
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot lock (Y page 121).
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
The sockets can be used for accessories with a
lighter. maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: include such items as chargers for mobile
Rthe
phones.
hot cigarette lighter falls
If you use the sockets for long periods when the
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to engine is switched off, the battery may dis-
objects, for example charge.
There is a risk of fire and injury. An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-
board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
ets is automatically cut. This ensures that there
out of reach of children. Never leave children is sufficient power to start the engine.
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Socket in the front center console
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter X Vehicles with a stowage compartment
when road and traffic conditions permit. cover: press the lower section of the cover.
The stowage compartment opens.
X Lift up the cover of the socket.
Z
242 Features
Socket in the rear compartment center Determining the location of the vehicle on a map
console is only possible if:
RGPS reception is available.
X Pull the cover out by the top of the handle
edge. Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the
X Lift up the cover of the socket.

Customer Assistance Center
The mbrace system

Socket in the trunk
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
follows:
X Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
or
X Use the multimedia system's volume control.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
RAutomatic and manual emergency call

RRoadside Assistance call
RMB Info call
You can find information and a description of all
X Lift up the cover of socket :. available features under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
mbrace System self-test
General notes After you have switched on the ignition, the sys-
tem carries out a self-diagnosis.
The mbrace system is only available in the USA. A malfunction in the system has been detected
You must have a license agreement to activate if one of the following occurs:
the mbrace service. Make sure that your system RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not
is activated and operational. To log in, press the come on during the system self-test.
ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
mentioned are not carried out, the system may Assistance button does not light up during
not be activated. self-diagnosis of the system.
If you have questions about the activation, con- RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
tact one of the following telephone hotlines: button does not light up during self-diagnosis
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at of the system.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-
1-866-990-9007 lowing buttons continues to light up red after
Shortly after successfully registering with the the system self-diagnosis:
mbrace service, a user ID and password will be - SOS button
sent to you by mail. You can use this password
- F Roadside Assistance call button
to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. - ï MB Info call button
The system is available if: RThe Inoperative or the Service Not
Activated message appears in the multi-
Rit has been activated and is operational
function display after the system self-diagno-
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is sis.
available for transmitting data to the Cus- If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
tomer Center the system may not operate as expected. In the
Ra service subscription is available event of an emergency, help will have to be
summoned by other means.
Features 243
Have the system checked at the nearest All important information on the emergency is
Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the transmitted, for example:
following service hotlines: Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at by the GPS system)
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Rvehicle identification number
1-866-990-9007
Rinformation on the severity of the accident
Emergency call Shortly after the emergency call has been initi-
ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-
lished between the Customer Assistance Center
Important safety notes and the vehicle occupants.
G WARNING RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
emergency if:
RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-

Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to
cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident the vehicle.
Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of If no voice connection can be established to the
road Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
the system has been unable to initiate an emer-
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be gency call.
seen by other road users, particularly when This can occur, for example, if the relevant
dark or in poor visibility conditions mobile phone network is not available. The indi-
There is a risk of an accident and injury. cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-
ously.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-
The Call Failed message appears in the mul-
lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. tifunction display and must be confirmed.
Move to a safe location along with other vehi- In this case, summon assistance by other
cle occupants. In such situations, secure the means.
vehicle in accordance with national regula-
tions, e. g. with a warning triangle. Making an emergency call
General notes
Observe the notes on system activation
(Y page 242).
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-
gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-
gered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually.
As soon as the emergency call has been initi-
ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The Connecting Call message X To initiate an emergency call manually:
appears in the multifunction display. press cover : briefly to open.
The audio output is muted. X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one
Once the connection has been made, the Call second ;.
Connected message appears in the multifunc- The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
tion display. until the emergency call is concluded.
X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
Z
244 Features
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the A voice connection is established between the
multifunction steering wheel. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
or and the vehicle occupants.
X Press the corresponding multimedia system From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
button for ending a phone call. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
X After the emergency call, close cover :.
can ascertain the nature of the problem
(Y page 247).
If the mobile phone network is unavailable, The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
mbrace will not be able to make the emergency ter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz tech-
call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle
pressing SOS button ;, you do not know if to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz
mbrace has successfully made the emergency Service Center.
call. In this case, always summon assistance by
You may be charged for services such as repair
other means.
work and/or towing.
You can find more information in the separate
Breakdown assistance button mbrace manual.
The system has not been able to initiate a Road-

side assistance call, if:
Rthe F indicator lamp for the Roadside
assistance call button is flashing continu-
ously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab-
lished.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-
work is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears on the mul-
tifunction display.
X To make a call: press Roadside assistance
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
call button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus- multifunction steering wheel.
tomer Assistance Center. or
The indicator lamp in Roadside assistanc but- X Press the corresponding multimedia system
ton : flashes while the call is active. The button for ending a phone call.
Connecting Call message appears on the
multifunction display. The audio output is MB Info call button
muted.
If a connection can be established, the Call
Connected message appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
Rcurrent location of the vehicle
Rvehicle identification number
The display of the multimedia system indicates
that a call is active. During the call, you can
change to the navigation menu by pressing the X To make a call: press MB Info call button :.
NAVI button on the multimedia system, for This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
example. tomer Assistance Center.
Voice output is not available in this case.
Features 245
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : Call priority

flashes while the connection is being made.
The Connecting Call message appears on When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
the multifunction display. The audio output is Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call
muted. can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency
call will take priority and override all other active
If a connection can be established, the Call calls.
Connected message appears in the multifunc-
tion display. The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the An emergency call can only be terminated by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
for example: All other calls can be ended by pressing:
Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering
Rvehicle identification number
wheel
Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia
The display of the multimedia system indicates
system to end the voice call

that a call is active. During the call, you can
change to the navigation menu by pressing the When a call is initiated, the audio system is
NAVI button on the multimedia system, for muted.
example. The mobile phone is no longer connected to the
Voice output is not available in this case. multimedia system.
A voice connection is established between the However, if you want to use your mobile phone,
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in
and the vehicle occupants. a safe location.
You receive information about operating your
vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser- Downloading destinations
vice Center and about other products and serv-
ices from Mercedes-Benz. Downloading destinations
You can find further information on the mbrace Downloading destinations gives you access to a
system under "Owners Online" at http:// database with over 15 million points of interest
www.mbusa.com. (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-
The system has not been able to initiate an MB gation system in your vehicle. If you know the
Info call, if: destination, the address can be downloaded.
Alternatively, you can obtain the location of
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button ï
Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations
is flashing continuously. in the vicinity.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Furthermore, you can download routes with up
Customer Assistance Center was estab- to four way points.
lished.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance to
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-
the address entered.
work is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears on the mul- X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
tifunction display. the controller and confirm with 7.
The system calculates the route and subse-
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
quently starts the route guidance with the
multifunction steering wheel. address entered.
or If you select No the address can be stored in
X Press the corresponding multimedia system the address book.
button for ending a phone call.
Z
246 Features
The destination download function is available Enter the e-mail address you specified when
if: setting up your mbrace account into the cor-
Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys- responding field.
tem. X Click "Send".
Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa- Information on specific commands such as
ble and data transfer is possible. "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the
website.
Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package Calling up a transmitted destination
and cannot be purchased separately. address
You can use the Route Assistance function even X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation lock (Y page 121).
system. The transmitted destination address is loaded
Within the framework of this service, you receive into the vehicle's navigation system.
a professional and reliable form of navigation A display message appears, asking whether
support without having to leave your vehicle. navigation should be started.
The customer service representative finds a X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1

suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur- the controller and confirm with 7.
rent position and the desired destination. You The system calculates the route and subse-
will then be guided live through the current route quently starts the route guidance with the
section. address entered.
If you select No the address can be stored in
Search & Send the address book.
If you have sent more than one destination
General notes address, each individual destination must be
To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be confirmed separately.
equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. Destination addresses are loaded in the same
Additionally, an mbrace service subscription order as the order in which they were sent.
must be completed. If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with
"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:
destination address found on Google Maps™ If multiple vehicles are registered under the
can be transferred via mbrace directly to your same e-mail address, the destination will be
vehicle's navigation system. sent to all the vehicles.
Specifying and sending the destination
address Vehicle remote opening
X Go to the website http://maps.google.com You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
and enter a destination address into the entry have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a
field. replacement SmartKey is not available.
X To send the destination address to the e- The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-
mail address of your mbrace account: Benz Customer Assistance Center.
click on the corresponding button on the web- The vehicle can be immediately opened
site. remotely within four days of the ignition being
Example: turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened
be sent to your vehicle. remotely.
X When the "Send" dialog window appears: The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-
ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-
able and a data connection is possible.
X Contact the following service hotlines:
Features 247
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center Stolen vehicle recovery service

at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007 If your vehicle has been stolen:
You will be asked for your password. X Notify the police.
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon The police will issue a numbered incident
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- report.
tance Center. X This number will be forwarded to the
Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
together with your PIN.
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
tion Center then tries to locate the system. The
Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®, Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Android™) contacts you and the local law enforcement
To do this, you will need your identification num- agency if the vehicle is located.
ber and password. However, only the law enforcement agency is
informed of the location of the vehicle.

Vehicle remote closing If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for
longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz
The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used Customer Assistance Center is automatically
when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and notified.
you are no longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center. Vehicle Health Check
The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer
within four days of the ignition being turned off. Assistance Center can provide improved sup-
After this time, remote closing may be delayed port for problems with your vehicle. During an
by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the
can no longer be valet locked remotely. Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle remote closing feature is available if The customer service representative can use
the relevant mobile phone network is available the received data to decide what kind of assis-
and a data connection is possible. tance is required. You are then, for example,
X Contact the following service hotlines: guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service
Center or a recovery vehicle is called.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an
or 1-866-990-9007 MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is
You will be asked for your password. initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.
The Roadside Assistance Connected mes-
The next time you are inside the vehicle and you
sage appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health
switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked
Check can be started, the Request for Vehi‐
Remotely message appears in the multifunction
cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐
display.
cle diagnostics? message appears in the
Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: display.
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec- X Press the Yes button to confirm the message.
tion X When the Vehicle Diagnostics Please
Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®, Start Ignition message appears: turn the
Android™) SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock
To do this, you will need your identification num- (Y page 121).
ber and password. X If the Please follow the instructions
received by phone and move your vehi‐
cle to a safe position. message
appears: please follow the instructions
Z
248 Features
received by phone and move your vehicle to a in "Previous destinations". message on

safe position. the multimedia system display.
The message in the display disappears. The route is saved.
The vehicle operating state check begins. X To start route guidance: select Yes.
During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐ An overview of the route is shown in the dis-
cle Diagnostics Active message. play.
If you select Cancel, the Vehicle Health If you select No, the saved route can be called
Check is canceled completely. up later in the navigation menu.
When the check is complete, the Sending X Select Start.
vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐ Route guidance starts.
nection may be interrupted during
data transfer) message appears. The vehicle Downloaded and saved routes can be called up
data can now be sent. again.
X Press the OK button to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer Speed alert
Assistance Center is terminated.
You can define the upper speed limit, which

The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
ring Data... message appears. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer a message will be sent to the Customer Assis-
Assistance Center. tance Center. The Customer Assistance Center
Depending on what the customer service rep- then forwards this information to you.
resentative agreed with you, the voice connec- You can select the way in which you receive this
tion is re-established after the transfer is com- information beforehand. Possible options
plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a include text message, e-mail or an automated
later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or call.
phone. The data you receive contains the following
Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is information:
the transfer of service data to the Customer Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-
Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display ded
shows a message to this effect together with Rthe time at which the speed limit was excee-
information about any special offers at your ded
workshop.
Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded
This information can also be called up under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle Geo fencing
(Y page 28). Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the
Information on Roadside Assistance vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be
(Y page 25). informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries
of the selected areas. You can select the way in
Downloading routes which you receive this information beforehand.
Possible options include text message, e-mail or
Downloading routes allows you to transfer and an automated call.
save predefined routes in the navigation sys- The area can be determined as either a circle or
tem. a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You
A route can be prepared and sent by either a can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-
customer service representative or under "Own- ferent settings are possible for each area.
ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. These settings can be called up under "Owners
Each route can include up to four way points. Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Once a route has been received by the naviga- Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and
tion system, you will see the Do you want to inform the customer service representative that
start route guidance? Destination you wish to activate geo fencing.
Received destination has been saved
Features 249
Currently inactive areas can be activated by text Important safety notes

message.
G WARNING
Triggering the vehicle alarm When you operate or program the garage door
With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's with the integrated garage door opener, per-
panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds sons in the range of movement of the garage
and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on door can become trapped or struck by the
the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec- garage door. There is a risk of injury.
onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off. When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage
Garage door opener door.
General notes
G WARNING
The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated

in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up
to three different door and gate systems. gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
Use the integrated garage door opener only on these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
garage doors that: is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation.
Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
Once programed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the Programming
function of the garage door system's remote
control. Please also read the operating instruc- Programming the buttons
tions for the garage door system. Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
When programming a garage door opener, park (Y page 249).
the vehicle outside the garage. Do not leave the
engine running while programming.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated garage
door opener, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service
Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
phone assistance services:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100 Garage door remote control A is not included
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of with the integrated garage door opener.
charge) X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
More information on HomeLink® and/or com- lock (Y page 121).
patible products is also available online at X Select one of buttons ; to ? to control the
http://www.homelink.com. garage door drive.
Notes on the declaration of conformity
(Y page 26).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Z
250 Features
X To start program mode: press and hold one ming additional remote controls", before carry-
of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage ing out the following steps.
door opener. Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage
The garage door opener is now in program door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-
mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are
lights up yellow. present within the sweep of the door or gate.
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time. lock (Y page 121).
If the selected button has already been pro-
X Get out of the vehicle.
gramed, indicator lamp : will only light up
yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. X Press the programming button on the door
X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator

drive unit.
lamp : flashes yellow. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate
X To program the remote control: point
the next step.
garage door remote control A towards but- X Get into the vehicle.
tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a dis- X Press previously programed button ;, =
tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm). or ? on the integrated garage door opener

X Press and hold button B on remote control repeatedly and in quick succession until the
A until indicator lamp : lights up green. door closes.
When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro- The rolling code synchronization is then com-
gramming is finished. plete.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- Notes on programming the remote con-
gramming was successful. The next step is to
synchronize the rolling code (Y page 250). trol
X Release button B on remote control A for Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break"
the garage door drive system. (or interruption) of the transmission signals
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,
programing procedure for the corresponding these signals may not last long enough for the
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing integrated garage door opener. The signal is not
so, vary the distance between remote control detected during programming. Comparable with
A and the rear-view mirror. Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers
also feature a "break".
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door opener Proceed as follows:
depends on the garage door drive system. Rif you live in Canada
Several attempts might be necessary. You Rif you have difficulties programming the
should test every position for at least garage door opener (regardless of where you
25 seconds before trying another position. live) as you follow the programming steps.
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the
Synchronizing the rolling code
integrated garage door opener.
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up
(Y page 249). yellow.
If the garage door system uses a rolling code, X Release the button.
you will also have to synchronize the garage Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
door system with the integrated garage door
X Press button B of garage door remote con-
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will
need to use the programming button on the door trol A for two seconds, then release it for two
drive control panel. The programming button seconds.
may be located in different places depending on X Press button B again for two seconds.
the manufacturer. It is usually located on the X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote
door drive unit on the garage ceiling. control A until indicator lamp : lights up
Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive green.
operating instructions, e.g. under "Program- When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
gramming is finished.
Features 251
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- button B on remote control A again before
gramming was successful. The next step is to transmission ends.
synchronize the rolling code. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
X Release button B of remote control A of the opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
garage door drive. tion/transmission.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programming process for the corresponding Opening/closing the garage door
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote control After it has been programmed, the integrated
A and the rear-view mirror. garage door opener performs the function of the
The required distance between remote con- garage door system remote control. Please also
trol A and the integrated garage door opener read the operating instructions for the garage
depends on the garage door drive system. door system.
Several attempts might be necessary. You X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
should test every position for at least lock (Y page 121).
25 seconds before trying another position. X Press button ;, = or ? which you have

programmed to operate the garage door.
Problems when programming Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
If you are experiencing problems programming cator lamp : lights up green.
the integrated garage door opener on the rear- Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-
view mirror, take note of the following instruc- cator lamp : flashes green.
tions:
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
RCheck the transmitter frequency used by as the button is pressed. The transmission is
garage door drive remote control A and halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
whether it is supported. The transmitter fre- indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
quency can usually be found on the back of X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.
remote control A for the garage door drive.
The integrated garage door opener is com-
patible with devices that have units which Clearing the memory
operate in the frequency range of 280 to Make sure that you clear the memory of the
433 MHz. integrated garage door opener before selling the
RReplace the batteries in garage door remote vehicle.
control A. This increases the likelihood that X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
garage door remote control A will transmit a lock (Y page 121).
strong and precise signal to the integrated
X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
garage door opener.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
RWhen programming, hold remote control A
and then green.
at varying distances and angles from but-
X Release buttons ; and ?.
tons ; to ? which you are programming. Try
various angles at a distance between 2and The memory of the integrated garage door
8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
at varying distances.
RIf another remote control A is available for
the same garage door drive, repeat the same
programming steps with this remote control
A. Before performing these steps, make sure
that new batteries have been installed in
garage door drive remote control A.
RNote that some remote controls only transmit
for a limited amount of time (the indicator
lamp on the remote control goes out). Press
Z
252 Features
Compass Calibrating the compass

Calling up the compass Notes
In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do
the following:
Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not in
the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage
transmission lines.
Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear win-
dow defroster.
Rclose all doors and the trunk lid.
Calibrating
X Make sure that there is sufficient space for
: Rear-view mirror
you to drive in a circle without impeding traf-

; Compass display fic.
= Opening X Switch on the ignition.
The compass displays in which compass direc- X Push a round pin into opening = for approx-
tion the vehicle is currently traveling: N, NE, E, imately six seconds, until symbol C is shown in
SE, S, SW, W or NW. compass display ;.
To receive a correct compass display reading, X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approx-
the magnetic field zone must be set and the imately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h).
compass calibrated. When the calibration has been successfully
completed, the current direction is shown in
Setting the compass compass display ;.
X Set your location using the magnetic field Magnetic field zone maps
zone maps (Y page 252).
X Push a round pen into opening = for approx- North America
imately three seconds.
The magnetic field zone currently selected
appears in compass display ;.
X To select the magnetic field zone: push a
round pen into opening = until the desired
magnetic field zone is selected.
If, after a few seconds, the display in compass
display ; changes direction, the magnetic
field zone has been selected.
Features 253
South America X Press safety catch knobs : onto retain-

ers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.

Floormats
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
X Slide the seat backwards.

X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
Z
254 Engine compartment
Engine compartment Rremove jewelry and watches

Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Hood
ple, away from moving parts
G WARNING
G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when tem work under high voltage. If you touch
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. components which are under voltage, you
There is a risk of an accident. could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before injury.
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. Never touch components of the ignition sys-
tem or fuel injection system when the ignition
G WARNING is switched on.
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is Opening the hood
a risk of injury to persons within range of
Maintenance and care
movement of the hood. G WARNING

Open and close the hood only when no one is Certain components in the engine compart-
within its range of movement. ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
G WARNING Working in the engine compartment poses a
Opening the hood when the engine is over- risk of injury.
heated or when there is a fire in the engine Where possible, let the engine cool down and
compartment could expose you to hot gases touch only the components described in the
or other service products. There is a risk of following.
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before G WARNING
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the When the hood is open and the windshield
engine compartment, keep the hood closed wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
and contact the fire department. the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
G WARNING the ignition before opening the hood.
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
ers or the hood.
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
Rswitch off the ignition
Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
Engine compartment 255
Closing the hood

X Raise the hood slightly and, at the same time,
remove support strut ? from yellow retaining
clip =.
X Swing support strut ? down and press it into
bracket A until it engages.
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of
approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Do not press the hood
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are closed. Open the hood again and close it with
switched off. a little more force.
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
Engine oil
General notes

Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may
be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if
you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
X Reach into the gap between the hood and the
Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-
radiator trim and press hood catch lever ; to
the left. imately five minutes if the engine is at normal
operating temperature.
X Raise the hood.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating tem-
perature, e.g. if the engine was only started
briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying
out the measurement.
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-

stick
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A. Working in the engine compartment poses a
X Lift up support strut ? and insert it into yel- risk of injury.
low retaining clip =. Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
Z
256 Engine compartment
! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are

approved for vehicles with a service system. A
list of the engine oils and oil filters that have
been tested and approved in accordance with
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products is available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following cause engine failure or damage
to the exhaust system:
RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have
not been expressly approved for the service
system
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after
tube. the replacement interval specified by the
X Wipe off oil dipstick :. service system has expired
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube RUse of engine oil additives
to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
mark ;, the oil level is correct. engine oil can result in damage to the engine
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or

or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil. engine oil siphoned off.
Adding engine oil

G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
Example: engine oil cap
following.
X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
G WARNING X Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
ponents in the engine compartment, it may engine oil.
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to clockwise.
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
ponents before starting the engine. (Y page 255).
Further information on engine oil (Y page 311).
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.
Engine compartment 257
Checking and adding other service X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested
products and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as
Checking coolant level it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
The cooling system is pressurized, particularly
when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, Windshield washer system
you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.
There is a risk of injury. G WARNING
Let the engine cool down before you open the Certain components in the engine compart-
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
open the cap to relieve pressure. of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
! The coolant may only be checked and cor- risk of injury.
rected when the engine is cool (coolant tem- Where possible, let the engine cool down and
perature below 104 ‡ (40 †). Checking the
coolant when the coolant temperature is

above 104 ‡ (40 †) may result in damage to following.
the engine or to the engine cooling system.
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down.
lock (Y page 121).
X Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
104 ‡ (40 †).
X Add the premixed washer fluid.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 121)
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
X Slowly turn cap : counter-clockwise and to
relieve excess pressure. If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears
in the multifunction display prompting you to
remove it.
add washer fluid (Y page 214).
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough Further information on windshield washer fluid/
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. antifreeze (Y page 313).
Z
258 ASSYST PLUS
ASSYST PLUS Displaying service messages

Service message X Switch on the ignition.
X Press the = or ; button to select the
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Serv. menu.
informs you of the next service due date.
You can find information on the type of service ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by press-
and service intervals in the Maintenance Book- ing the a button.
let. The service due date appears in the multi-
You can obtain further information from an function display.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Information about Service
does not show any information on the engine
oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
level (Y page 255). interval display
The multifunction display shows a service mes-
sage for several seconds, e.g.:
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
has been inadvertently reset, this setting can
RService A in .. days be corrected at a qualified specialist work-

RService A due shop.
RService A overdue by .. days Have service work carried out as described in
Depending on the operating conditions of the the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the lead to increased wear and damage to the
next service due date is displayed. major assemblies or the vehicle.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-
number or another letter, indicates the type of ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the
service. A stands for a minor service and B for a ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the
major service. service work has been carried out. You can also
You can obtain further information from an obtain further information on maintenance
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. work, for example.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not take into account any periods of time during Special service requirements
which the battery is disconnected. The specified maintenance interval takes only
Maintaining the time-dependent service sched- the normal operation of the vehicle into
ule: account. Under arduous operating conditions or
X Note down the service due date displayed in increased load on the vehicle, maintenance
the multifunction display before disconnect- work must be carried out more frequently, for
ing the battery. example:
or Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the stops
battery disconnection periods from the ser- Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
vice date shown on the display. distances
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
Hiding a service message Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods
Rin particularly dusty conditions, or if air-recir-
X Press the a or % button on the steering culation mode is frequently used
wheel.
In these or similar operating conditions, have
the interior filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil
and oil filter, for example, changed more fre-
Care 259
quently. Under arduous operating conditions, Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
the tires must be checked more often. Further paintwork
information can be obtained at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes- Automatic car wash
Benz Center.
G WARNING
Driving abroad Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
also available in other countries. You can obtain After the vehicle has been washed, brake
further information from any authorized carefully while paying attention to the traffic
Mercedes-Benz Center.
conditions until full braking power is restored.
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the

Care HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
General notes
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
H Environmental note Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD

Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
Rin the car wash
ner.
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of Automatic Car Wash as these use special
the following: cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
Rdry, rough or hard cloths damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
Rabrasive cleaning agents ! Make sure that the automatic transmission
Rsolvents is in position N when washing your vehicle in
Rcleaning agents containing solvents a tow-through car wash. The vehicle could be
damaged if the transmission is in another
Do not scrub.
position.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective films
with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. ! Make sure that:
You could otherwise scratch or damage the Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
surfaces and protective film. are fully closed.
! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (the
time directly after cleaning, particularly after OFF button has been pressed/the airflow
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. control is set to position 0).
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor- Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position 0.
rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a wash from the very start.
long period of time. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax
from the windshield and the wiper blades. This
Use care products and cleaning agents recom- will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. caused by residue on the windshield.
Z
260 Care
Washing by hand RLamps

RSeals
In some countries, washing by hand is only
RTrim
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in each country. RVentilation slots
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Damaged seals or electrical components can
vehicle in direct sunlight. lead to leaks or failures.
X Use a soft sponge to clean. ! Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car vehicle are covered with a decorative film.
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm)
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen- between the parts of the vehicle covered with
tle jet of water. the film and the nozzle of the high pressure
X Do not point the water jet directly towards the
cleaner.
air inlet. Information about the correct distance is
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
available from the equipment manufacturer.
frequently. Move the power washer nozzle around when
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
cleaning your vehicle.
thoroughly with a chamois.
Cleaning the paintwork
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-

work.
! Do not affix:
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as Rstickers
soon as possible when driving in winter.
Rfilms
Rmagnetic plates or similar items
Power washers
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
G WARNING damage the paintwork.
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
to the tires or chassis components. Compo- care cannot always be completely repaired. In
such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
Do not use power washers with circular jet X Soak insect remains with insect remover and
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
tires or chassis components replaced imme- X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
diately. the treated areas afterwards.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,
! Always maintain a distance of at least fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter
power washer nozzle. Information about the fluid.
correct distance is available from the equip- X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
ment manufacturer.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
Do not aim directly at any of the following: surface, use the paint care products recommen-
ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the
RTires case approximately every three to five months,
RDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. depending on the climate conditions and the
RElectrical components care product used.
RBattery If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the
RConnectors
paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-
Care 261
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz Cleaning the vehicle parts

should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun or on Cleaning the wheels
the hood while the hood is hot.
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch- G WARNING
Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint- The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
work quickly and provisionally. blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
Matte finish care nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
! The following may cause the paint to tires or chassis components replaced imme-
become shiny and thus reduce the matte
diately.
effect:
Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
unsuitable materials to remove brake dust. This could damage
Rfrequent use of automatic car washes wheel bolts and brake components.

Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight
! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing time directly after cleaning, particularly after
products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
purpose of paintwork care. These products Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-
are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
considerable surface damage or, more spe- heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
cifically, to shiny, spotted areas. pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a long period of time.
Cleaning the windows
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
treatment under any circumstances. G WARNING
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear You could become trapped by the windshield
matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with injury.
a clear matte finish.
The vehicle should ideally be washed by hand Always switch off the windshield wipers and
using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
water. wiper blades.
Use only insect remover and car shampoo from
the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from
products. the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you
will damage the hood.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.
Z
262 Care
! Clean the water drainage channels of the X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lights
windshield and the rear window at regular with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
pollen may under certain circumstances pre- cloths.
vent water from draining away. This can lead
to corrosion damage and damage to elec- Cleaning the mirror turn signals
tronic components.
X Clean the inside and outside of the windows ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
is recommended and approved by Mercedes- cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
Benz. scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals.
Cleaning wiper blades X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-
nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
G WARNING sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
You could become trapped by the windshield cloths.
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
Cleaning the sensors
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and ! If you clean the sensors with a power
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or washer, make sure that you keep a distance
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle
wiper blades.
and the power washer nozzle. Information
about the correct distance is available from
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from the equipment manufacturer.
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you
will damage the hood.
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
ite coating could be damaged. This could
cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
windshield.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp
cloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with
water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths Cleaning the rear view camera
which are suitable for plastic light lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
could scratch or damage the plastic light len- around the rear view camera with a power
ses. washer.
Care 263
restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by

cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and
after washing.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-
Rabrasive cleaning agents
tion lock.
Rcommercially-available household cleaning
X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the
multimedia system (see the separate operat- agents
ing instructions). These may damage the display surface. Do
X To clean the rear view camera: use clear
not put pressure on the display surface when

cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-
water and a soft cloth to clean camera
age to the display.
lens :.
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it
is switched off and has cooled down.
Cleaning the exhaust pipes
X Clean the display surface using a commer-
G WARNING cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD
display cleaner.
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber
become very hot. If you come into contact cloth.
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Cleaning the plastic trim
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow G WARNING
these components to cool down before touch- Care products and cleaning agents containing
ing them. solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- come loose in the event of air bag deploy-
based cleaning agents, such as bathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner. ment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with black exhaust agents to clean the cockpit.
pipes: the black-chrome tailpipe finishers
should not be polished with a chrome polish.
They will otherwise lose their black sheen. For ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:
optimal care, the faceplates should be rubbed Rstickers
with a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash. Rfilms
Commercially available engine and care oils Rscented oil bottles or similar items
are suitable for this.
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paint-
work polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
the excess polish residue after polishing. sunscreen to come into contact with the plas-
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
and corrosive environmental factors may cause the surfaces.
flash rust to form on the surface. You can
Z
264 Care
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free Genuine leather seat covers
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
! To retain the natural appearance of the
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- leather, observe the following cleaning
ucts recommended and approved by instructions:
Mercedes-Benz.
RClean genuine leather covers carefully with
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again. a damp cloth and then wipe the covers
down with a dry cloth.
RMake sure that the leather does not
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or become soaked. It may otherwise become
selector lever rough and cracked.
ROnly use leather care agents that have
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recom- been tested and approved by Mercedes-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele- Leather is a natural product.
ments It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents Rdifferences in the texture
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes Rmarks caused by growth and injury
or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag- Rslight nuances of color
ing the surface.
These are characteristics of leather and not
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. material defects.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and can Seat covers of other materials
lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use ! Observe the following when cleaning:
a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
the trim pieces.
moistened with a solution containing 1%
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
unsure as to whether the trim pieces are
chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized moistened with a solution containing 1%
Mercedes-Benz Center. detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- depend on the type of dirt and how long it
ucts recommended and approved by has been there.
Mercedes-Benz. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.
Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-
Cleaning the seat covers tions to avoid leaving visible lines.
General notes Cleaning the seat belts

! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers G WARNING
made out of real leather, artificial leather or
DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage Seat belts can become severely weakened if
the cover. bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
Note that regular care is essential to ensure that belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
the appearance and comfort of the covers is an accident. This poses an increased risk of
retained over time. injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
Care 265
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †)
or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets

X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or
dry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Z
266 Flat tire
Where will I find...? Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit

Vehicle tool kit X Open the trunk lid.
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 237).
General notes X Remove the tire-change tool kit.
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit is The tire-change tool kit contains:
located in the stowage well under the trunk RJack
floor. RLug wrench
Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tire- ROne pair of gloves
change tool kit is in the stowage well under the
RFolding wheel chock
trunk floor.
Apart from certain country-specific variations,
the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change
tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are Flat tire
specific to the vehicle. For more information on
which tire changing tools are required and Preparing the vehicle
approved to perform a wheel change on your Your vehicle may be equipped with:
vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-
Tools required for changing a wheel may
include, for example: ties) (Y page 267)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-
RJack
Breakdown assistance
cles with MOExtended tires

RWheel chock
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 266)
RLug wrench
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
RAlignment bolt not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on changing and mounting wheels
(Y page 301).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 140).
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
: Tire inflation compressor straight-ahead position.
; Tire sealant filler bottle X Switch off the engine.
= Towing eye X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
X Open the trunk lid. SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 237). X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 268) or remove it.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0.
Towing eye = is located under tire inflation
compressor :. This is the same as the SmartKey having been
removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
ton from the ignition lock (Y page 121).
Flat tire 267
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
via your smartphone (Y page 122). counted from the moment the tire pressure loss
X Make sure that the passengers are not endan- warning appears in the multifunction display.
gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is You must not exceed a maximum speed of
near the danger area while a wheel is being 50 mph (80 km/h).
changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting When replacing one or all tires, please observe
in the wheel change should, for example, the following specifications for your vehicle's
stand behind the barrier. tires:
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic
Rsize
conditions when doing so.
Rtype and
X Close the driver's door.
Rthe "MOExtended" marking
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat used as a temporary measure. Make sure that
properties) you use the proper size and type (summer or
winter tire).
General notes Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- is therefore recommended that you additionally
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
or more tires. The affected tire must not show
any clearly visible damage. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking Important safety notes
next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-
ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 296). G WARNING
MOExtended tires may be used only in conjunc- When driving in emergency mode, the driving
tion with an activated tire pressure loss warning characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
system (Canada only) or tire pressure monitor ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
(USA only). There is a risk of an accident.
If a pressure loss warning message appears
in the multifunction display: Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
Robserve the instructions in the display mes-
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
sages (Y page 209).
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
Rcheck the tire for damage.
vehicle.
Rif driving on, observe the following notes.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is Stop driving in emergency mode if:
approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi- Ryou hear banging noises.
cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully Rthe vehicle starts to shake.
laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km).
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
tance possible depends upon: RESP® is intervening constantly.
RVehicle speed Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
RRoad condition After driving in emergency mode, have the
ROutside temperature wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode workshop with regard to their further use. The
may be reduced by extreme driving conditions defective tire must be replaced in every case.
or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
moderate style of driving.
Z
268 Flat tire
TIREFIT kit ! Residue from the tire sealant may come out
of the filler hose after use. This could cause
Important safety notes stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
TIREFIT is a tire sealant. bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire H Environmental note
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera- Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
G WARNING workshop.
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis- ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor
for longer than ten minutes at a time without
tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: a break. It may otherwise overheat.
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger The tire inflation compressor can be operated
than those mentioned above. again once it has cooled down.
Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-
pressor.
on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident. Using the TIREFIT kit
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified

G WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
from children. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin X Do not remove any foreign objects which have
immediately with water. penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor- compressor from the stowage well under-
oughly with clean water. neath the trunk floor (Y page 266).
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink instrument cluster within the driver's field of
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, vision.
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
and seek medical attention immediately.
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
Flat tire 269
Do not switch off the tire inflation com-

pressor during this phase.
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then
have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa
(2.0 bar/29 psi).
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-
sure reached" (Y page 270).
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire
pressure not reached" (Y page 269).
X Remove filler hose B and connector = from If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected
the bottom section of the tire inflation com- areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if
pressor housing ;. possible.
X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have
mounting on yellow cap A of tire sealant filler them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry
bottle : until the connector engages. cleaner as soon as possible.
X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap
A of tire sealant bottle : into the mounting
of tire inflation compressor ;. Tire pressure not reached
Yellow cap A and both hooks must engage. If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
not been attained after ten minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-
imately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pres-
sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire. G WARNING
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
If the required tire pressure is not reached
X Insert plug = into a 12 V socket in your vehi- after the specified time, the tire is too badly
cle. damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 241). tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition pressure that is too low can significantly
lock (Y page 121). impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
X Press on and off switch ? on the tire inflation acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
compressor to ON.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
The tire is inflated. specialist workshop.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The
pressure can briefly rise to approximately
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Z
270 Flat tire
Tire pressure reached X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
G WARNING Loading Information placard on the driver's
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the
fuel filler flap for values.
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
tire inflation compressor.
accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
the specified maximum speed with a tire that
has been repaired using tire sealant.
The maximum permissible speed for a tire

sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).
The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be
affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's
field of vision.
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
been attained after ten minutes: X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the Note that tire sealant may escape when you
faulty tire. unscrew the filler hose.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the
unscrew the filler hose. sealed tire.
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-
tion compressor.
X Pull away immediately.
X Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with the
tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
G WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair X To remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire
inflation compressor, press together the lock-
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
ing tabs on the yellow cap.
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- tion compressor.
acteristics. There is a risk of accident. The filler hose remains attached to the tire
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified sealant bottle.
specialist workshop. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-
shop and have the tire changed there.
i In cases such as the one mentioned above, X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
replaced as soon as possible at a qualified
ter. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery (vehicle) 271
Battery (vehicle) Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of
Important safety notes electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-
ple:
Special tools and expert knowledge are required
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
when working on the battery, e.g. removal and
installation. You should therefore have all work fibers
involving the battery carried out at a qualified Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
specialist workshop. Rif you push or pull the battery across the car-
pet or other synthetic materials
G WARNING Rif you rub the battery with a cloth
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and G WARNING
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can During the charging process, a battery produ-
lead to function restrictions applying to ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys- sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. connected battery does not come into con-
You could lose control of the vehicle, for tact with vehicle parts.
example: RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
Rwhen braking tery.
Rin RIt is important that you observe the descri-
the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not bed order of the battery terminals when
adapted to the road conditions connecting and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
connected.
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
RIt is particularly important to observe the
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
should have all work involving the battery car- described order when connecting and dis-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. connecting the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
For further information about ABS and ESP®, terminals while the engine is running.
see (Y page 60) and (Y page 63).
G WARNING G WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
explosion. the battery. Keep children away from batter-
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
body to remove any existing electrostatic plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
build-up. tion.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when H Environmental note

charging the battery as well as when jump-start- Batteries contain dangerous
ing. substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
Z
272 Battery (vehicle)
the household rubbish. They Risk of explosion.

must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment. Fire, open flames and smoking are
Dispose of batteries in an prohibited when handling the bat-
environmentally friendly tery. Avoid creating sparks.
manner. Take discharged
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact
batteries to a qualified spe-
with skin, eyes or clothing.
cialist workshop or a special
Wear suitable protective clothing,
collection point for used bat- especially gloves, apron and face-
teries. guard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately
! Have the battery checked regularly at a with clear water. Contact a physician
qualified specialist workshop. if necessary.
Observe the service intervals in the Mainte- Wear eye protection.
nance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist
workshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving the bat-
tery carried out at a qualified specialist work- Keep children away.
shop. In the exceptional case that it is neces-

sary for you to disconnect the battery your-
self, make sure that:
Observe this Operator's Manual.
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure
that the ignition is switched off. Check that
all the indicator lamps in the instrument
cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic com- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
ponents, such as the alternator, may be mends that you only use batteries which have
damaged. been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
Ryou first remove the negative terminal
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
clamp and then the positive terminal occupants from suffering acid burns should the
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. battery be damaged in the event of an accident.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system
may be damaged. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum
possible service life, it must always be suffi-
Rin vehicles with automatic transmission,
ciently charged.
the transmission is locked in position P
after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
is secured against rolling away. You can discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.
then no longer move the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a
qualified specialist workshop. You can also
The battery and the cover of the positive ter- charge the battery with a charger recommended
minal clamp must be installed securely during by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-
operation. ist workshop for further information.
Comply with safety precautions and take pro- Have the battery condition of charge checked
tective measures when handling batteries. more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a
lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
parked for a long period of time.
Only replace a battery with a battery that has
been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Jump-starting 273
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
and do not require any electrical consumers. can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus
conserving battery power. an explosion.
If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
you reconnect the battery, you will have to: charging it or jump-starting.
Rset the clock using the multimedia system;
see the separate operating instructions. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum
charging voltage of 14.8 V.
Rreset the function for folding the exterior mir-
rors in/out automatically, by folding the mir- ! Only charge the battery using the jump-
rors out once (Y page 96) starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 273).
Charging the battery X Open the hood.
G WARNING X Connect the battery charger to the positive

terminal and ground point in the same order
During charging and jump-starting, explosive as when connecting the donor battery in the
gases can escape from the battery. There is a jump-starting procedure (Y page 273).
risk of an explosion. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient very likely that the discharged battery has fro-
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the
Do not lean over a battery. vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of
a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The start-
ing characteristics can be impaired, particularly
G WARNING at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out bat-
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do Only charge the installed battery with a battery
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over charger which has been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially
the battery. Keep children away from batter- adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- an accessory. It permits the charging of the bat-
tion. tery in its installed position. Contact an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
G WARNING tion and availability. Read the battery charger's
operating instructions before charging the bat-
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- tery.
tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a pos-
itive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
Z
274 Jump-starting
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is very
likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor
charge the battery. Let the battery thaw first. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter.
The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out
battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-
start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables that are not damaged and have a sufficient cross-section and insulated
terminal clamps.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Jump-starting 275
Make sure that:

RThe jumper cables are not damaged.
RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while
the jumper cables are connected to the battery
RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is running,
such as the V-belt pulley or the fan
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignition lock and remove it.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
X Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the
jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from pos-
itive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Close the hood.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
Z
276 Towing and tow-starting
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified
Towing and tow-starting the vehicle brakes automatically in certain

situations.
Important safety notes To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar sit-
G WARNING uations:
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or Rwhen towing the vehicle
no longer available if: Rin the car wash
Rthe engine is not running. ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is
Rthe brake system or the power steering is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty,
malfunctioning. visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
or the vehicle's electrical system. towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be
damaged.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
force may be necessary to steer or brake. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery pur-
There is a risk of an accident. poses as this could damage the vehicle. If in
doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
make sure that the steering moves freely. ! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the
G WARNING vehicles could be damaged.
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
steering wheel lock has been engaged. There 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph
is a risk of an accident. (50km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
Always switch off the ignition when towing the 30 miles (50km), the front axle must be raised
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. or the entire vehicle raised and transported.
G WARNING ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This

could damage the vehicle.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible ! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
use the key instead of the Start/Stop button.
gross weight of your vehicle, the:
Otherwise, the automatic transmission may
Rthe towing eye could detach itself shift to position P when the driver's or front-
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- passenger door are opened, which could lead
to damage to the transmission.
over.
There is a risk of an accident. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be started by tow-starting. This could oth-
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, erwise damage the transmission.
its weight should not be greater than the per-
It is better to have the vehicle transported than
missible gross weight of your vehicle. to have it towed away.
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight If the vehicle can no longer be driven because of
of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden- an accident or breakdown, you have the follow-
tification plate (Y page 308). ing options:
Rtransporting the vehicle
! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated,
Towing and tow-starting 277
As a rule, you should have the vehicle trans- X Remove the towing eye from the stowage
ported. space.
Rtowing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow bar The towing eye is located with the vehicle tool
Only tow the vehicle in exceptional cases. kit under the cargo compartment floor
The battery must be connected and charged. (Y page 266).
Otherwise, you: Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing eye is
beneath the tire inflation compressor.
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
ignition lock
Rcannot release the electric parking brake
X Take cover : off the opening.
Rcannot move the transmission to position N
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop.
The function of the electric parking brake and
the parking lock is dependent on the on-board
voltage. Removing the towing eye
If the on-board voltage is low or if there is a sys- X Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
tem malfunction: X Attach cover : to the bumper and press until
Rthe electric parking brake may not be applied it engages.
in certain circumstances, or X Place the towing eye in the stowage well
Rthe transmission may not be shifted to P beneath the cargo compartment floor in the
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. the cargo compartment (Y page 266).
radio.
X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back the tire
Disarm the automatic locking feature before the inflation compressor.
vehicle is towed (Y page 184). You could other-
wise be locked out when pushing or towing the
vehicle. Towing the vehicle with the front axle
raised
Installing/removing the towing eye Observe the important safety notes when tow-
ing your vehicle with the front axle raised
Installing the towing eye (Y page 276).
Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed
with the front axle raised.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away
with both axles on the ground or be loaded up
and transported.
! The ignition must be switched off if the vehi-
cle is being towed with the front axle raised.
Otherwise, ESP® may intervene and damage
the brake system.
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY-
LESS-GO start function: you must use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
(Y page 122).
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and
at the front, under covers :. lock.
Z
278 Towing and tow-starting
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the resetting the combination switch, the hazard
brake pedal and keep it depressed. warning lamp starts flashing again.
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion P.
X Release the brake pedal. Transporting the vehicle
4MATIC vehicles or vehicles with auto-
X Switch off the automatic locking
(Y page 184).
matic transmission
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 101).
X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-
tion 0 and leave the SmartKey in the ignition
lock.
Towing a vehicle with both axles on

the ground
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 276). ! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY- front and rear axles must be stationary and on
LESS-GO start function: you must use the the same transportation vehicle. Positioning
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button over the connection point of the transport
(Y page 122). vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may
otherwise be damaged.
The automatic transmission automatically shifts
to position P when you open the driver's or front-
passenger door or when you remove the Smart- All vehicles
Key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure ! You may only secure the vehicle by the
that the automatic transmission stays in posi- wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
tion N when towing the vehicle, you must axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
observe the following points: vehicle could be damaged.
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 121).
lock. X Shift the transmission to position N.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
N. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the electric parking brake.
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignition
X Release the brake pedal.
lock and remove it.
X Secure the vehicle.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 101). The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-
i In order to signal a change of direction when poses.
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination
switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator
lamps for the direction of travel flash. After
Fuses 279
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles wise, components or systems could be dam-

aged.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
doing so will damage the transmission. fuse box when the cover is open.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may only either be towed ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is
away with both axles on the ground or be loaded lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-
up and transported. ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is ation of the fuses.
damaged, have the vehicle transported on a The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
truck or trailer. faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
In the event of damage to the electrical sys- nents on the circuit and their functions stop
tem: operating.
If the battery is defective, the automatic trans- Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
mission will be locked in position P. To shift the same rating, which you can recognize by the
automatic transmission to position N, you must color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the
provide power to the vehicle's electrical system fuse allocation chart.
in the same way as when jump-starting The fuse allocation chart is in the fuse box in the
(Y page 273). front-passenger footwell (Y page 280).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
trailer. cause traced and rectified at a qualified special-
ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
Before changing a fuse
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam- X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
age the automatic transmission. (Y page 140).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
i You can find information on "Jump-starting" X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
under (Y page 273).
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
Fuses The vehicle electronics now have status 0.
Important safety notes This is the same as the SmartKey having been
removed.
G WARNING The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
age, the electric cables could be overloaded. the direction of travel
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell
accident and injury. The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified front-passenger footwell (Y page 280).
new fuses having the correct amperage.
! Only use fuses that have been approved for

Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
correct fuse rating for the system concerned.
Only use fuses marked with an "S". Other-
Z
280 Fuses
Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
the ignition before opening the hood.
X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and close.

X Close the hood.
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-

well
X Open the hood.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from
the fuse box.
X To open: open clamps ;.
X Fold up cover : in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.
X To open: open the front-passenger door.

X Remove the floormat.
X Fold out perforated floor covering : in the
X To close: check whether the seal is lying cor-

rectly in cover :.
X Insert cover : at the back into openings =
on the fuse box.
X Fold down cover :.
X To release cover =, press retaining

clamp ;.
X Fold out cover = in the direction of the arrow
to the catch.
Fuses 281
X Remove cover = forwards.

Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the
lower right-hand side of cover =.
X To close: insert cover = on the left-hand side
of the fuse box into the retainer.
Cover = engages in the retainers.
X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock audi-
bly.
X Fold back perforated floor covering :.
X Install the floormats.
Z
282 Operation
Important safety notes Further information regarding wheels and tires

can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 306).
G WARNING You can ask for information regarding permitted
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, wheel-tire combinations at an authorized
the wheel brakes or suspension components Mercedes-Benz Center.
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Information on tire pressure can be found:
dent. Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
Always replace wheels and tires with those on the B-pillar on the driver's side
that fulfill the specifications of the original (Y page 292)
part. Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 138)
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 285)
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmodel Operation
When replacing tires, make sure to use the Information on driving
correct:
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
Rdesignation heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
Rmanufacturer While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
Rmodel and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-
ing to one side. This may indicate that the
wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
G WARNING a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
Wheels and tires
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
There is a risk of accident. tire damage could also be causing the unusual
handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
Tires without run-flat characteristics: damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. qualified specialist workshop.
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over
consult a qualified specialist workshop. obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
Tires with run-flat characteristics: angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels
or tires.
Rpay attention to the information and warn-
ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics). Regular checking of wheels and tires
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi- G WARNING
cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-
rectly can impair the operating safety. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
Before purchasing and using non-approved sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
shop and inquire about: Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
Rsuitability and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Operation 283
Check wheels and tires for damage at least once Minimum tire tread depth for:
a month. Check wheels and tires after driving
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
attention to damage such as:
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
Rcuts in the tires
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
Rpunctures in the tires tire tread depth is reached.
Rtears in the tires
Rbulges on tires
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
the tire (Y page 283). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount
anything onto the valve other than the standard
valve cap or other valve caps approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure Marking : shows where bar indicator ; for
monitoring systems. tread wear is integrated into the tire tread.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par- Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.
ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres- Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.
sure as necessary (Y page 285). They are visible once a tread depth of approx-
The service life of tires depends, among other imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this
things, on the following factors: is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be
Wheels and tires

replaced.
RDriving style
RTire pressure
RDistance covered Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
Notes on tire tread G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
G WARNING
city and the approved maximum speed could
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. is a risk of accident.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
tire load rating and speed rating required for
ditions. There is a risk of accident.
your vehicle.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type
ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you and make.
should regularly check the tread depth and Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
the condition of the tread across the entire ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
width of all tires. Observe here the "MOExtended tires (tires
Z
284 Winter operation
with run-flat characteristics)" section temperatures could cause cracks to form,

(Y page 267). thereby damaging the tires permanently.
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for
wheels. this type of damage.
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the G WARNING
first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only
reach their full performance after this dis- Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
tance. sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
RDo not drive with tires which have too little your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
tread depth, as this significantly reduces the Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). and replace any damaged tires immediately.
RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear.
M+S tires
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat G WARNING
properties) M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one a risk of an accident.
or more tires.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-
tion with an activated tire pressure loss warning (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
system (Canada only) or tire pressure monitor
(USA only) and only on wheels specifically tes- At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter
ted by Mercedes-Benz. tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are
identified by the M+S marking.
Wheels and tires
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a

flat tire (Y page 267). Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter. These tires have been developed specif-
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from ically for driving in snow.
a qualified specialist workshop. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-
tics.
Winter operation Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
General notes mounted.
When you have mounted the M+S tires:
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. X Check the tire pressures (Y page 285).
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" X Restart the tire pressure monitor (USA only)
section (Y page 301). (Y page 291).
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada) (Y page 289)
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle
to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
Tire pressure 285
Snow chains Tire pressure

G WARNING Tire pressure specifications
If snow chains are mounted on the rear
wheels, the snow chains could cause abrasion
to the vehicle body or to chassis components. G WARNING
This could cause damage to the vehicle or the Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
tires. There is a risk of an accident. following risks:
To avoid hazardous situations:
Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
Rnever mount snow chains on the rear and vehicle speed increase.
wheels Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
Ronly mount snow chains in pairs on the unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
front wheels. traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
! On some tire sizes there is not enough space
for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehi- ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
cle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire com- There is a risk of an accident.
binations" section under "Tires and wheels". Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
mends that you only use snow chains that have ing the spare wheel:
been specially approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding Rmonthly, at least
standard of quality. For more information, Rif the load changes
please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Rbefore beginning a long journey
If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
Wheels and tires

the following points in mind:
off-road driving
RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel- If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
tire combinations (Y page 306).
ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads i The data on the Tire and Loading Informa-
completely covered by snow. Remove the tion placard and tire pressure table shown
snow chains as soon as possible when you here are examples. Tire pressure specifica-
come to a road that is not snow-covered. tions are vehicle-specific and may deviate
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow
from the data shown here. The tire pressure
specifications that are valid for your vehicle
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if
can be found on the Tire and Loading Infor-
you wish to mount snow chains.
mation placard and tire pressure table on the
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible vehicle.
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
RDo not use Parking Pilot when snow chains
General notes
are installed (Y page 162).
You may wish to deactivate ESP® (Y page 63) The recommended tire pressures for the tires
when pulling away with snow chains installed . mounted at the factory can be found on the
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a labels described here.
controlled manner, achieving an increased driv- Further information on tire pressures can be
ing force (cutting action). obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
286 Tire pressure
Tire and Loading Information placard
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully

laden" are defined in the table for different num-
: Recommended tire pressures
bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on actual number of seats may differ.
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 292).
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid
for the maximum permissible load and up to the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires
permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see
Wheels and tires
illustration (example).
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.
Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be
found on the tire sidewall (Y page 296).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighter loads and/or lower road
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the
higher values:
Rif you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
Rif you want to drive at higher speeds
i The tire pressures for increased loads and/

The tire pressure table contains the recommen- or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pres-
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- sure table, may have a negative effect on driv-
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con- ing comfort.
ditions.
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol- If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can
lowing tire pressure information is only valid for lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-
that tire size; see illustration (example). den loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tire pressure 287
Important notes on tire pressure too low for the current operating conditions. If
you check the tire pressure when the tires are
G WARNING warm, the resulting value will be higher than if
the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the reduce the tire pressure to the value specified
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise
pressure that is too low may result in a tire be too low.
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tire pressures for
RCheck the tire for foreign objects. cold tires:
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
valve is leaking. on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
(Y page 138)
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires

If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and Underinflated tires
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
G WARNING
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
risk of an accident. they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Wheels and tires

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire tires, including the spare wheel.
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire Underinflated tires may:
pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec- Roverheat,leading to tire defects
tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure
Radverselyaffect handling
can be checked in the on-board computer.
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres- Overinflated tires
sures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold: G WARNING
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours because they are damaged more easily by
and road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
Rif the vehicle has been driven less than 1 mile also suffer from irregular wear, which can
(1.6 km) severely impair the braking properties and the
The tire temperature changes depending on the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the accident.
tire load. If the tire temperature changes by
18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take tires, including the spare wheel.
this into account when checking the pressure of
warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is
Z
288 Tire pressure
Overinflated tires may: Checking tire pressures manually

Rincrease the braking distance
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
Radversely affect handling proceed as follows:
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort checked.
Rbe more susceptible to damage X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
Maximum tire pressures X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure table
(Y page 285).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
pressure to the recommended value.
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,
using the tip of a pen for example. Then check
the tire pressure again using the tire pressure
checker.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire Tire pressure loss warning system
inflation pressure. Always observe the recom- (Canada only)
mended tire pressure for your vehicle when
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 285). General notes
Wheels and tires
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure
cific and may deviate from the values in the loss warning system monitors the set tire pres-
illustration. sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
This enables the system to detect significant
pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of
Checking the tire pressures a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,
a corresponding warning message will appear in
Important safety notes the multifunction display.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning
Observe the notes on tire pressure by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press
(Y page 285). 'OK' to Restart message in the multifunction
Information on air pressure for the tires on your display in the Serv. menu. Information on the
vehicle can be found: message display can be found in the "Restarting
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information the tire pressure loss warning system" section
placard on the B-pillar (Y page 289).
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 138) Important safety notes
Rin the "Tire pressure" section The tire pressure warning system does not warn
you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 285).
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace
the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An
even loss of pressure on several tires at the
Tire pressure 289
same time cannot be detected by the tire pres- If you wish to confirm the restart:
sure loss warning system. X Press the a button.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is appears in the multifunction display.
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes.
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
X Press the a button.
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
movements. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if: After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss
warning system will monitor the set tire pres-
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's sures of all four tires.
tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. X Press the % button.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner- or
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates of X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
acceleration). appears, press the 9 or : button to
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi- select Cancel.
cle or on the roof) X Press the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- restart will continue to be monitored.
ing system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if Tire pressure monitor
you have:
Rchanged the tire pressure General notes
Wheels and tires

Rchanged the wheels or tires
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
Rmounted new wheels or tires cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure mon-
pressures are set properly on all four tires for itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or
the respective operating conditions. more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only
The recommended tire pressure can be found functions if the corresponding sensors are
on the Tire and Loading Information placard installed in all wheels.
on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure Information on tire pressures is displayed in the
table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire multifunction display. After a few minutes of
pressure loss warning system can only give driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is
reliable warnings if you have set the correct shown in the Serv. menu of the multifunction
tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is display, see illustration (example).
set, these incorrect values will be monitored.
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 285).
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (Y page 121).
select the Serv.menu.
For information on the message display, refer to
Tire Pressure.
the "Checking the tire pressure electronically"
X Press the a button. section (Y page 291).
The Run Flat Indicator Active Press
'OK' to Restart message appears in the
multifunction display.
Z
290 Tire pressure
Important safety notes minated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended.
G WARNING
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
reasons, including the installation of incom-
should be checked at least once every two
patible replacement or alternate tires or
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
from functioning properly. Always check the
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If
ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires
your vehicle has tires of a different size than
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
function properly.
Information placard or, if available, the tire
pressure label, you should determine the It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
proper tire pressure for those tires. pressure to that recommended for cold tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has which is suitable for the operating situation
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring (Y page 285). Note that the correct tire pressure
for the current operating situation must first be
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a sub-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires stantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, threshold for the warning message is aligned to
when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire
you should stop and check your tires as soon pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of
as possible, and inflate them to the proper the cold tires (Y page 291). The current pres-
sures are saved as new reference values. As a
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin-
result, a warning message will appear if the tire
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can pressure drops significantly.
Wheels and tires
lead to tire failure. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's notes on the recommended tire pressure
handling and stopping ability. Please note that (Y page 285).
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
underinflation has not reached the level to halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres- movements.
sure telltale. The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates
the system is not operating properly. The
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire
tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp pressure on one or more tires is significantly
will flash for approximately a minute and then too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-
remain continuously illuminated. This functioning.
sequence will be repeated every time the vehi- Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a
cle is started as long as the malfunction minute and then remains lit constantly, the
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu- tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, a message
appears in the multifunction display. Observe
Tire pressure 291
the information on display messages Tire pressure monitor warning mes-

(Y page 209). sages
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction
of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres- loss in one or more tires, a warning message is
sure warning lamp flashing for approximately shown in the multifunction display. The yellow
one minute and then remaining lit. When the tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure
warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of message appears in the multifunction display,
driving. the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on- The tire pressure must be corrected when the
board computer may differ from those meas- opportunity arises.
ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The RIf the Check Tire Pressure message
tire pressures shown by the on-board computer appears in the multifunction display, the tire
refer to those measured at sea level. At high pressure in one or more tires has dropped
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a significantly. The tires must be checked.
pressure gauge are higher than those shown by RIf the Tire Pressure Warning Tire Fail‐
the on-board computer. In this case, do not ure message appears, the tire pressure in one
reduce the tire pressures. or more tires has dropped suddenly. The tires
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can must be checked.
be affected by interference from radio transmit- Observe the instructions and safety notes in the
ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way display messages in the "Tires" section
radios) that may be being operated in or near the (Y page 209).
vehicle.
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,
the tire pressures may be displayed for the
Checking the tire pressure electroni- wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified
cally after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-
sures are displayed for the correct positions.
Wheels and tires

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (Y page 121).
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
select the Serv.menu. When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
X Press the 9 or : button to select existing warning messages are deleted and the
Tire Pressure. warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur-
X Press the a button. rently set tire pressures as the reference values
The current tire pressure of each tire is shown for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure
in the multifunction display. monitor will automatically detect the new refer-
ence values after you have changed the tire
If the vehicle was parked for longer than pressure. However, you can also set reference
20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be values manually as described here. The tire
displayed after driving a few minutes pressure monitor then monitors the new tire
message is shown. pressure values.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon- X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-
itor automatically detects new wheels or new ded for the corresponding driving situation on
sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire the Tire and Loading Information placard on
pressure value to the individual wheels is not the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 285).
possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active
message is shown instead of the tire pressure You can find more tire pressure values for
display. The tire pressures are already being various operating conditions in the tire pres-
monitored. sure table inside the fuel filler flap
(Y page 138).
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on
all four wheels.
Z
292 Loading the vehicle
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 steering and driving characteristics and lead
in the ignition lock (Y page 121). to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
select the Serv. menu. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
Tire Pressure. your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
X Press the a button.
exceeding the maximum load.
The multifunction display shows the current
tire pressure for each tire or the Tire pres‐ Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
sure will be displayed after driving maximum possible load.
a few minutes message. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is
X Press the : button. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire
The multifunction display shows the Use and Loading Information placard shows the
Current Pressures as New Reference maximum permissible number of occu-
Values message. pants and the maximum permissible vehicle
load. It also contains details of the tire sizes
If you wish to confirm the restart: and corresponding pressures for tires
X Press the a button. mounted at the factory.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted mes- (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-
sage appears in the multifunction display. pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-
After driving for a few minutes, the system tification plate informs you of the gross
checks whether the current tire pressures are vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
within the specified range. The new tire pres- vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
sures are then accepted as reference values fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-
and monitored. mation about the maximum gross axle
weight rating on the front and rear axle.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
X Press the % button. the maximum weight that can be carried by
Wheels and tires
The tire pressure values stored at the last one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed
restart will continue to be monitored. the maximum load or the maximum gross
axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
Radio type approval for the tire pres-
sure monitor
Country Radio type approval number
USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
FCC ID: MRXGG4
FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
IC: 2546A-GG4
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
: B-pillar, driver's side
Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
Loading the vehicle 293
Maximum permissible gross vehicle Maximum number of seats : indicates the

weight rating maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-
specific and can differ from the details shown.
The number of seats in your vehicle can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Determining the correct load limit

X Specification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Step-by-step instructions
Information placard: "The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed The following steps have been developed as
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load
suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
and luggage must not exceed the specified
Safety Act of 1966".
value.
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
i The specifications shown on the Tire and weight of occupants and cargo should never
Loading Information placard in the illustration exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
are examples. The maximum permissible Tire and Loading Information placard.
gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
Wheels and tires

and may differ from that in the illustration.
the driver and passengers that will be riding in
You can find the valid maximum permissible
your vehicle.
gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on
the Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
Number of seats
able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-
city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity cal-
culated in step 4.
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of
Z
294 Loading the vehicle
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load
limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 292).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Step 2
Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs
pants (68 kg) (91 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(82 kg) (86 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs
Wheels and tires
(73 kg) (68 kg)

Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
Step 3
Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
mum gross vehicle 750 lbs (340 kg) = 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)
Vehicle identification plate vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight
rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on
Even if you have calculated the total cargo care- the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
fully, you should still make sure that the gross the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 292).
All about wheels and tires 295
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Example:

(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas- RTreadwear grade: 200
sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if
RTraction grade: AA
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight. RTemperature grade: A
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi- All passenger car tires must conform to the stat-
mum permissible weight that can be carried by utory safety requirements in addition to these
one axle (front or rear axle). grades.
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle cific and may deviate from the values in the
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), illustration.
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)
weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
All about wheels and tires under controlled conditions on a specified U.S.
government course. For example, a tire graded
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- 150 would wear one and one-half times as well
ards on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand- the actual conditions of their use, however, and
ards may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
Traction
Wheels and tires

G WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.
government specifications. Their purpose is to ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information the drive train.
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers
have to grade tires using three performance fac- The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
= temperature grade. These regulations do not tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in ured under controlled conditions on specified
North America are provided with the corre- government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
sponding quality grading markings on the side- crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
wall of the tire. performance.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
maximum section width. You should pay special attention to road condi-
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Z
296 All about wheels and tires
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread Tire labeling

depth (Y page 283). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in Overview
comparison with summer tires. The braking dis-
tance is still much further than on surfaces that
are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-
priate care when driving.
Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
(Y page 284).
Temperature
G WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
(Y page 300)
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions ; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi-
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus- cation Number (Y page 299)
tained high temperature can cause the material = Maximum load rating (Y page 298)
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 288)
Wheels and tires
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire A Manufacturer

failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of B Tire material (Y page 299)
performance which all passenger car tires must C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety and speed rating (Y page 296)
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory D Load index (Y page 298)
test wheel than the minimum required by law. E Tire name
The markings described above are on the tire in
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and
the manufacturer's name.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed rating
G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
tire load rating and speed rating required for description, depending on the manufacturer
your vehicle. (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim
flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a
numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 292).
Example:
: Tire width Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
; Nominal aspect ratio in % load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.
= Tire code For further information on the maximum tire
? Rim diameter load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 298).
A Load bearing index For further information on the load bearing
B Speed rating index, see "Load index" (Y page 298).
General: depending on the manufacturer's Speed rating:speed rating B specifies the
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may approved maximum speed of the tire.
not contain any letters or may contain one letter i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
that precedes the size description. from the data in the example.
If there is no letter preceding the size descrip- Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
tion (as shown above): these are passenger
Wheels and tires

the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your
vehicle tires according to European manufac- driving style to the traffic conditions.
turing standards.
Summer tires
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man- Index Speed rating
ufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: compact S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
are only designed for temporary use in an emer- T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
gency. H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Tire width:tire width : shows the nominal tire
width in millimeters. V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
between the tire height and tire width and is
shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
by dividing the tire width by the tire height. ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Tire code:tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag- ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over
149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size
ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
Z
the size description, depending on the man- Make sure that your tires have the required
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
The service specification is made up of load- required speed rating for your vehicle can be
bearing index A and speed rating B. found in the "Tires" section (Y page 306).
RIf the size description of your tire includes Further information about reading tire data can
"ZR" and there are no service specifications, be obtained from any qualified specialist work-
ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out shop.
the maximum speed.
If a service specification is available, the max- Load index
imum speed is limited according to the speed
rating in the service specification. Example:
245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is
the service specification. The letter "Y" rep-
resents the speed rating. The maximum
speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR" and the service specifica-
tion must be given in parentheses. Example:
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-
cates that the maximum speed of the tire is
over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man- In addition to the load-bearing index, load
ufacturer about the maximum speed. index : may be imprinted after the letters that
All-weather tires and winter tires identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire.
Speed rating (Y page 296).
Index Speed rating RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard load
Wheels and tires
Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) (SL) tire

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) on the maximum load that the tire can carry at
a certain pressure
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In from the data in the example.
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also
have the i snowflake symbol on the tire Maximum load rating
wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-
ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-
tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on
snow. They have been especially developed
for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-
cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory
may be higher than the maximum speed that the
electronic speed limiter permits.
1 Or M+S i for winter tires.

Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis- Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
sible weight for which the tire is approved. provides information about the age of a tire. The
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the first and second positions represent the week of
specified load limit. The maximum permissible manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and endar week. Positions three and four represent
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that
the driver's side (Y page 292). is marked with "3208", was manufactured in
week 32 in 2008.
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
illustration. from the data in the example.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire characteristics

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-
ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on
the sidewall of each tire produced.
This information describes the type of tire cord

and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;.
Wheels and tires

The TIN is a unique identification number. The i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders from the data in the example.
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the Definition of terms for tires and loading
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica- Tire ply composition and material used
tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and
Describes the number of plies or the number of
manufacturing date A.
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,
symbol : marks that the tire complies with the polyester and other materials.
requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-
portation. Bar
Manufacturer identification code: manufac- Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
turer identification code ; provides details on per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code are the equivalent of 1 bar.
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code
with four symbols. DOT (Department of Transportation)
For further information about retreaded tires, DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
see (Y page 306). U S Department of Transportation.
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Normal occupant weight
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific The number of occupants for which the vehicle
characteristics of the tire. is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Z
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
with regards to tread quality, tire traction and weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the
temperature characteristics. The quality grad- vehicle including all accessories, occupants,
ing assessment is made by the manufacturer fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
following specifications from the U.S. govern- applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is
ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of specified on the vehicle identification plate on
the tire. the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Recommended tire pressures Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The recommended tire pressure applies to the The maximum weight is the sum of:
tires mounted at the factory. Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
The Tire and Loading Information placard con- Rthe weight of the accessories
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
Rthe load limit
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-
mum permissible vehicle speed. Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
The tire pressure table contains the recommen- equipment
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- Kilopascal (kPa)
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
ditions. Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is
Increased vehicle weight due to optional bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
equipment 1 bar.
The combined weight of all standard and Load index
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
the vehicle or not. index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity
Wheels and tires
Rim more precisely.

This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is Curb weight
mounted.
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
tem and optional equipment if these are instal-
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
gers or luggage.
axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's Maximum load rating
side.
The maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
Speed rating sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is
approved.
The speed rating is part of the tire identification.
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is Maximum permissible tire pressure
approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
Maximum load on one tire
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of
the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross two.
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-
cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-
cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
Changing a wheel 301
PSI (pounds per square inch) Load bearing index

A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. The load bearing index (also load index) is a code
that contains the maximum load bearing capa-
Aspect ratio city of a tire.
Relationship between tire height and tire width
in percent. Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the tires
Tire pressure and the road surface.
This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-
ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur- Treadwear indicators
face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-
square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level
The tire pressure should only be corrected when with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm)
the tires are cold. has been reached.
Cold tire pressure Occupant distribution
The tires are cold: The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires designated seating positions.
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours Total load limit
and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
1 mile (1.6 km)
the vehicle.
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact with
the road. Changing a wheel
Bead Flat tire
Wheels and tires

The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely The "Breakdown assistance" section
on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the (Y page 266) contains information and notes on
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-
the wheel rim. ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat
tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires
Sidewall with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 267).
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Weight of optional extras Rotating the wheels
The combined weight of those optional extras G WARNING
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
optional extras, such as high-performance severely impair the driving characteristics if
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per- the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
formance battery, are not included in the curb The wheel brakes or suspension components
weight and the weight of the accessories. may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
TIN (Tire Identification Number) dent.
This is a unique identifier which can be used by Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example and tires are of the same dimensions.
for a product recall, and thus identify the pur-
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur- ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and monitor, electronic components are located
the manufacturing date. in the wheel.
Z
302 Changing a wheel
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near Mounting a wheel

the valve. This could damage the electronic
components. Preparing the vehicle
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
"Changing a wheel" section (Y page 301).
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires position.
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically X Switch off the engine.
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
the center. SmartKey from the ignition lock.
On vehicles that have the same size front and X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord- or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's The vehicle electronics now have status 0.
warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no This is the same as the SmartKey having been
warranty book is available, the tires should be removed.
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may
be required earlier. Do not change the direction
of wheel rotation. ton from the ignition lock (Y page 121).
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the
brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota- via your smartphone (Y page 122).
ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
restart the tire pressure loss warning system the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
(Canada only) or the tire pressure monitor (USA X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away
only). (Y page 140).
Wheels and tires
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

Direction of rotation rolling away
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-
planing. These advantages can only be gained if
the tires are installed corresponding to the
direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its
correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it
can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 266).
The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away, for example when changing a wheel.
X Fold both plates upwards :. inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the
X Fold out lower plate ;. parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
openings in base plate =. non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be
used, e.g. rubber mats.
RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
due to the restricted height.
RMake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does not
exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
RNever place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
RDo not lie under the vehicle.
X Place chocks or other suitable items under
RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago-
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. raised.
RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid
when the vehicle is raised.
Raising the vehicle RMake sure that no persons are present in the
vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
G WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
Wheels and tires

Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
must be positioned vertically, directly under
the jacking point of the vehicle.
! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking

up the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-
wise, your vehicle could be damaged. X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the
wheel you wish to change by about one full
Observe the following when raising the vehi- turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
cle:
RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cific jack that has been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being
changed. It must not be used for performing
maintenance work under the vehicle.
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-
hill slopes.
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-
ing away by applying the parking brake and Jacking points
Z
304 Changing a wheel
The jacking points are located just behind the

front wheel housings and just in front of the rear
wheel housings (arrows).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with
AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body,
the vehicle has covers installed next to the jack-
ing points on the outer sills.
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly

beneath the jacking point.
X Turn ratchet wrench A until jack ? sits
completely on jacking point = and the base
of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn ratchet wrench A until the tire is raised
a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMG equip-
ment)
Removing a wheel
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles
with AMG equipment: fold cover ; ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty
upwards. surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could
otherwise be damaged when you screw them
in.
X Unscrew the wheel bolts.
Wheels and tires
X Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
X Take ratchet wrench A out of the vehicle tool lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
kit and place it on the hexagon nut of jack ? accident.
so that the letters AUF are visible. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
X Position jack ? at jacking point =. damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and

safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
(Y page 301).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective
wheel.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur- pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A).
faces. The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft
X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and (130 Nm).
Wheels and tires

push it on. X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools
tight. in the vehicle again.
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles
Lowering the vehicle with AMG equipment: insert the cover into
the outer sill.
G WARNING X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts wheel and adjust it if necessary.
and bolts are not tightened to the specified Observe the recommended tire pressure
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. (Y page 285).
Have the tightening torque immediately Canada only: as long as you are driving with the
checked at a qualified specialist workshop emergency spare wheel mounted, the tire pres-
after a wheel is changed. sure loss warning system cannot function relia-
bly. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning
X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon system when the defective wheel has been
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visi- replaced with a new wheel.
ble. Vehicles with tire pressure monitor (USA
X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is only): all mounted wheels must be equipped
once again standing firmly on the ground. with functioning sensors.
X Place the jack to one side.
Z
306 Wheel and tire combinations
Wheel and tire combinations The recommended pressures for various oper-
ating conditions can be found:
General notes Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
You can ask for information regarding permitted on the B-pillar on the driver's side
wheel/tire combinations at an authorized Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Mercedes-Benz Center. Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
You should regularly check the pressure of the sures under various operating conditions
emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to (Y page 285).
long trips, and correct the pressure as neces- Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
sary (Y page 285). The value on the wheel is the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance
valid. recommendations of the tire manufacturer in
the vehicle document wallet.
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use tires and wheels Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip
which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz the vehicle:
specifically for your vehicle. Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left
These tires have been specially adapted for and right)
use with the control systems, such as ABS or Rwith the same type of tire (summer tires,
ESP®, and are marked as follows: MOExtended tires, winter tires)
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics) Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 267).
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires) Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may is therefore recommended that you additionally
only be used on wheels that have been spe- equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
Wheels and tires
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain a qualified specialist workshop.
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition, when
driving with a load, tire dimension variations
could cause the tires to come into contact
with the bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tires or the vehi-
cle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-
age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or
accessories other than those tested and
approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop.
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-
ous damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if
you have no information about their previous
usage.
Vehicle electronics 307
Information regarding technical data In particular, the following conditions must be

complied with:
i The data stated here specifically refers to a Ronly approved wavebands may be used.
vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an Robserve the maximum permissible output
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the in these wavebands.
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Ronly approved antenna positions may be
used.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
Vehicle electronics may cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into
Installing two-way radios and mobile account current scientific discussions relating
phones (RF transmitters) to the possible health hazards that may result
from electromagnetic fields.
G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from modified
or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can
interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can
compromise the operational safety of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have all work to electrical and
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from incor- Approved antenna positions
rectly operated RF transmitters can interfere : Front roof area
with the vehicle electronics, for example: ; Rear roof area
= Rear fender
Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with
? Trunk lid
an exterior antenna
Technical data
Rthe exterior antenna has been installed i On vehicles with panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, installing an antenna to the
incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type
front or rear roof area is not permitted.
This can compromise the operational safety On the rear fenders, it is recommended to
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. position the antenna on the side of the vehicle
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna closest to the center of the road.
mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
When operating RF transmitters in the vehi- when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles
cle, always connect them with the low-reflec- - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket
tion exterior antenna. radio frequency transmitting equipment).
Observe the legal requirements for accessory
parts.
! The operating permit may be invalidated if
the instructions for installation and use of RF If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
transmitters are not observed. equipment, use the power supply or antenna
connections intended for use with the basic wir-
ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-
plement when installing.
Deviations with respect to frequency bands,
maximum transmission outputs or antenna
positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
308 Identification plates
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the Identification plates

base of the antenna must not exceed the fol-
lowing values: Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
Frequency band Maximum
cle identification number (VIN)
transmission
output
Short wave 100 W
3 - 54 MHz
4 m waveband 30 W
74 - 88 MHz
2 m waveband 50 W
144 - 174 MHz
Trunked radio system/ 10 W
Tetra X Open the driver's door.
380 - 460 MHz You will see vehicle identification plate :.
70 cm waveband 35 W
400 - 460 MHz
Mobile communications 10 W
(2G/3G/4G)
The following can be used in the vehicle without

restrictions:
RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW
RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a
Technical data
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)

maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio system/Tetra) : VIN
RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) ; Paint code
There is no restriction for antenna positions on
the outside of the vehicle for the following fre-
quency bands:
RTrunked radio system/Tetra
R70 cm waveband
R2G/3G/4G
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

: VIN
; Paint code
i The data shown on the vehicle identification
plate is used only as an example. This data is
Service products and filling capacities 309
different for every vehicle and can deviate Service products and filling capaci-
from the data shown here. You can find the ties
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
identification plate. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Vehicle identification number (VIN) Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
Dispose of service products in an environ-
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost mentally responsible manner.
position.
Service products include the following:
X Fold floor covering : upwards.
You will see VIN ;. RFuels
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle iden-
RCoolant
tification plate (Y page 308).
RBrake fluid
The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of
the windshield (Y page 309). RWindshield washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must match.
Engine number Only use products recommended by Mercedes-
Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of
Technical data
products which have not been recommended is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or
goodwill gestures. They are listed in this
Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the appro-
priate section.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on
the containers:
: Emission control information plate, includ-
ing the certification of both federal and Cali- RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
fornian emissions standards RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) Other designations or recommendations indi-
= Engine number (stamped into the crank- cate a level of quality or a specification in
case) accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB
229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
310 Service products and filling capacities
Other identifications, for example: Tank capacity

R0 W-30
R5 W-30
Model Total capa-
city
R5 W-40
CLA 250 13.2 US gal
(50.0 l)
Fuel All other models 14.8 US gal
(56.0 l)
G WARNING Model Of which
reserve
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx.
sion. 2.1 US gal
(8.0 l)
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine All other models Approx.
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before 1.6 US gal
refueling. (6.0 l)
G WARNING Gasoline
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
Fuel grade
You must make sure that fuel does not come
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
If you or others come into contact with fuel, result in damage to the fuel system and the
observe the following: engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
Technical data
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained

RWash away fuel from skin immediately completely.
using soap and water. ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
out delay. refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-
ing. age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
RImmediately change out of clothing which system.
has come into contact with fuel. ! Do not use the following:
RE15(gasoline with 15% ethanol)
RE85(gasoline with 85% ethanol)
RE100 (100% ethanol)
RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
RM100 (100% methanol) obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz

RGasoline with metalliferous additives Center.
RDiesel Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- ded fuels that have additives.
mended for your vehicle. The fuel quality available in some countries may
not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the
! To ensure the longevity and full perform- fuel injection system as a result. In such cases,
ance of the engine, only premium-grade and in consultation with an authorized
unleaded gasoline must be used. Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable with the cleaning additive recommended by
and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes
of a lower grade, observe the following pre- and mixing ratios specified on the container.
cautions:
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular
unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre- Engine oil
mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as
possible. General notes
RDo not drive at the maximum speed.
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label
on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.
i For further information, consult a qualified
specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
CLA 250, CLA 250 Sport, CLA 250 4MATIC,
CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC: as a temporary meas-
ure, if the recommended fuel is not available,
you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec-
ification other than is necessary to fulfill the
Technical data
an octane rating of 88 AKI/93 RON.
prescribed service intervals. Do not change
All other models: as a temporary measure, if the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve
the recommended fuel is not available, you may longer replacement intervals than those pre-
also use regular unleaded gasoline with an scribed. You could otherwise cause engine
octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may damage or damage to the exhaust gas after-
reduce engine performance and increase fuel treatment.
consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and
sudden acceleration. Never refuel using gaso- Follow the instructions in the service interval
line with a lower AKI. display regarding the oil change. Otherwise,
you may damage the engine and the exhaust
Information on refueling (Y page 138). gas aftertreatment.
Additives When handling engine oil, observe the important
! Operating the engine with fuel additives safety notes on service products (Y page 309).
added later can lead to engine failure. Do not The engine oils are matched to the performance
mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.
include additives for the removal and preven- You should therefore only use engine oils and oil
tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be filters that are approved for vehicles with main-
mixed with additives recommended by tenance systems.
Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
for use on the product label. More information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
about recommended additives can be Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Z
312 Service products and filling capacities
The table shows which engine oils have been on the Internet at
approved for your vehicle. http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Model MB-Freigabe or i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
MB-Approval qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
All models 229.5
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils Coolant

for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-
ers. G WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
Filling capacities
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
The following values refer to an oil change ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
including the oil filter. Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
Model Capacity freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 5.8 US qt (5.5 l)
antifreeze from components before starting
All other models 5.9 US qt (5.6 l) the engine.
Additives ! Only add coolant that has been premixed

with the desired antifreeze protection. You
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. could otherwise damage the engine.
This could damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-
vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the
Brake fluid Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even
Technical data
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture in countries where high temperatures prevail.
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake sufficiently protected from corrosion and
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the overheating.
brake system when the brakes are applied i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
hard. This would impair braking efficiency. qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
There is a risk of an accident. ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at Comply with the important safety precautions
the specified intervals. for service products when handling coolant
(Y page 309).
When handling brake fluid, observe the impor- The coolant is a mixture of water and corrosion
tant safety notes on service products inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate. It performs
(Y page 309). the following tasks:
The brake fluid change intervals can be found in RAnti-corrosion protection
the Maintenance Booklet. RAntifreeze protection
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- RRaising the boiling point
Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 331.0. If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to
-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant
Information about approved brake fluid can be
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or
during operation is approximately 266 ‡ When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
(130 †). tant safety notes on service products
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor (Y page 309).
concentration in the engine cooling system At temperatures above freezing:
should:
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
cooling system against freezing down to SummerFit.
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †)
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down
to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be At temperatures below freezing:
dissipated as effectively X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
Mercedes-Benz recommends a coolant or cor- water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
rosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-
accordance with mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all
with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate year round.
antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.
i The coolant is checked with every mainte-
nance interval at a qualified specialist work- Climate control system refrigerant
shop.
Filling capacities The climate control system of your vehicle is fil-
led with refrigerant R‑134a.
Model Capacity The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
Mercedes‑AMG Approx. 12.6 US qt type used can be found on the left, on the under-
vehicles (11.9 l) side of the hood.
All other models Approx. 8.2 US qt ! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil
(7.8 l) approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Technical data
The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with
any other PAG oil that is not approved for
R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate
Windshield washer system control system may be damaged.
Important safety notes Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or
replacing component parts, may only be carried
G WARNING out by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-
cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639,
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if must be adhered to.
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- Always have work on the climate control system
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit

washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-
wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.
Z
314 Vehicle data
Refrigerant instruction label Vehicle data

General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:
- Tires
- Load
- Condition of the suspension
- Optional equipment
Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload.
Example: refrigerant instruction label

: Warning symbol Dimensions and weights
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable standards
? PAG oil part number
A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol : advises you about:
RPossible dangers
RHaving service work carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop
Filling capacities
Model Refrigerant
Model :
Mercedes‑AMG 23.6 ± 0.4 oz Opening
vehicles (670 ± 10 g) height
Technical data
All other models 22.9 ± 0.4 oz Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 68.0 in

(650 ± 10 g) (1727 mm)
All other models 68.9 in
Model PAG oil (1749 mm)
All models 4.2 oz Missing values were not available at time of

(120 g) going to print.
Model
Vehicle width 80.0 in (2032 mm)
including exterior
mirrors
Wheelbase 106.3 in (2699 mm)
Turning radius 36.1 ft (11.0 m)
Vehicle data 315
Model Vehicle length

Mercedes‑AMG vehi- 184.7 in (4691 mm)
cles
All other models 182.7 in (4640 mm)
Model Vehicle height

Mercedes‑AMG vehi- 55.7 in (1416 mm)
cles
All other models 56.5 in (1436 mm)
Model Maximum roof

load
Mercedes‑AMG vehi- 220.5 lb (100 kg)
cles
All other models
Model Maximum trunk

load
Mercedes‑AMG vehi- 220.5 lb (100 kg)
cles
All other models
Technical data
Z
316

Operator's Manual: Order No. P117 0017 13 Part No. 117 584 40 03 Edition A 2017

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator's Manual: Order No. P117 0017 13 Part No. 117 584 40 03 Edition A 2017

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CLA

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 22 Lights and windshield wipers ............ 99

Features .............................................. 238

Maintenance and care ...................... 254

Breakdown assistance ..................... 266

Wheels and tires ............................... 282

Technical data ................................... 307

1, 2, 3 ... Front air bag (driver, front

Hiding a service message .............. 258 Engaging park position

Change of ownership .......................... 25 Switching the rear window

Storing and maintaining current Function/notes ............................. 150

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- DYNAMIC SELECT button

Starting the engine with the Exhaust pipe

Fuel filler flap Adjusting (rear) ................................ 92

Reading lamp ................................. 102 High beam flasher .......................... 100

Important safety notes .................. 162 Rain closing feature (panorama

Turn signals (front) ......................... 105 Search & Send

Button overview ............................... 33 Tires/wheels ................................. 306

General notes ................................ 289 Maximum load on a tire (defini-

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 314 Cleaning ......................................... 261

Introduction Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

replace and repair all factory-installed parts in

have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, (USA) at the hotline number

Maintenance When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe

Operating safety ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:

Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a

Diagnostics connection Always have the following work carried out at an

The following text is reproduced as required of Data stored in the vehicle

1966. A wide range of electronic components in your

Information on license for free and open-source

C Overhead control panel 38 K Opens the hood 254

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel

i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20 i In vehicles with multimedia system

Function Page Function Page

Center console, lower section

i Mercedes-AMG vehicles Function Page

Door control panel

Overhead control panel

Function Page Function Page

switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-

Belt warning for the driver and front

Air bags door or side window. You may otherwise be in

G WARNING When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-

Front air bags

Side impact air bags

Window curtain air bags : are integrated into

Requirements The indicator lamps inform you whether the

front air bag is correct. If OCS determines that:

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to G WARNING

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning G WARNING

ded protective function. This poses an

G WARNING three-point seat belt can be properly fastened

Child restraint system G WARNING

You will find further information on stowing

integrated in the child restraint system. In the

If the rear backrest is not engaged and locked,

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

Top Tether anchorages the child restraint system manufacturer's

Child restraint system on the front-